NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1

NDA-24296 ISSUE 1 STOCK # 200774
Circuit Card Manual
OCTOBER, 2000
NEC America, Inc.
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC America, Inc. NEAX and D term are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Copyright 2000 NEC America, Inc. Printed in the U.S.A
PAGE No. i ii iii iv v vi vii viii ix x xi xii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PAGE No. 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 4
DATE
OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5
ISSUE 8
DATE
NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual
Revision Sheet 1/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No. 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102
PAGE No. 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140
ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
Revision Sheet 2/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No. 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178
PAGE No. 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
Revision Sheet 3/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No. 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254
PAGE No. 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
Revision Sheet 4/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No. 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330
PAGE No. 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
Revision Sheet 5/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No. 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406
PAGE No. 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
Revision Sheet 6/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No. 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482
PAGE No. 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
Revision Sheet 7/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No. 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558
PAGE No. 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
Revision Sheet 8/9
NDA-24296
PAGE No. 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618
ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PAGE No.
ISSUE No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ISSUE 1 DATE OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5 DATE DATE DATE
ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE
ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE
ISSUE 4
ISSUE 8
Revision Sheet 9/9
NDA-24296
NDA-24296 ISSUE 1 OCTOBER, 2000

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii LIST OF TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SN1695 CPRBF-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 PH-GT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 PH-GT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 PA-PC94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 PA-PW54-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 PA-PW54-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 PA-PW55-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 PA-PW55-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 PH-DK10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 PH-IO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 PH-M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 PH-PC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 PH-PC45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 PH-PW14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 PH-SW12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 PU-SW01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 PZ-ME44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 PA-CFTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
NDA-24296
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Revision 1.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page PA-CK14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 PH-CK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 PH-CK16-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 PH-CK17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 PH-CK17-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 PH-CK18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 PA-8COTBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 PA-16COTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 PA-CS02-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 PA-CS08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 PA-CS08-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 PA-CS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 PA-8LCBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 PA-16LCBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 PA-16LCBJ-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 PA-16LCBJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 PA-16LCBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 PA-16LCBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 PA-16ELCJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 PA-16ELCJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 PA-FCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 PA-24LCBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 PA-M69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 PA-M96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 PA-M103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 PA-8RSTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 PA-8RSTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 PA-8RSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 PA-SDTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 PA-2CCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 PA-24CCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 PA-2DCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 PA-ILCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 PA-4ILCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 PA-8ILCE-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 PA-4DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 PA-4DATB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 PA-4AMPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 PA-8TLTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 PA-M87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 PA-24PRTB-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 PA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 PA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ii Revision 1.0
NDA-24296
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-4 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-10 Figure 2-11 Figure 2-12 Figure 2-13 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-15 Figure 2-16 Figure 2-17 Figure 2-18 Figure 2-19 Figure 2-20 Figure 2-21 Figure 2-22 Figure 2-23 Figure 2-24 Figure 2-25 Figure 2-26 Figure 2-27 Figure 2-28 Figure 2-29 Figure 2-30 Figure 2-31 Figure 2-32 Figure 2-33 Title Page
Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Face Layout ofPA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Face Layout ofPA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Face Layout ofPA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Face Layout ofPA-PW55-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Face Layout ofPA-PW55-B Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NDA-24296
LIST OF FIGURES
Page iii Revision 1.0
LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Figure 2-34 Figure 2-35 Figure 2-36 Figure 2-36 Figure 2-37 Figure 2-38 Figure 2-39 Figure 2-40 Figure 2-41 Figure 2-42 Figure 2-43 Figure 2-44 Figure 2-45 Figure 2-46 Figure 2-47 Figure 2-48 Figure 2-49 Figure 2-50 Figure 2-51 Figure 2-52 Figure 2-53 Figure 2-54 Figure 2-55 Figure 2-56 Figure 2-57 Figure 2-58 Figure 2-59 Figure 2-60 Figure 2-61 Figure 2-62 Figure 2-63 Figure 2-63 Figure 2-64 Figure 2-65 Figure 2-65 Figure 2-65 Figure 2-66 Figure 2-67 Figure 2-68 Figure 2-69 Figure 2-70 Figure 2-71 Figure 2-72 Figure 2-73 Figure 2-74 Figure 2-75 Figure 2-76 Figure 2-77 Figure 2-78 Title Page
Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 PCM Highway Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 External Interface for PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Location of PC-PH20 in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 PLO Function Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Voice Prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 PLO Connector Leads Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 TSW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Music/Tone Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 External Interface for PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 External Interface for PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 External Interface for PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 External Interface for PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
LIST OF FIGURES Page iv Revision 1.0
NDA-24296

Figure Figure 2-79 Figure 2-80 Figure 2-81 Figure 2-82 Figure 2-83 Figure 2-84 Figure 2-85 Figure 2-86 Figure 2-87 Figure 2-88 Figure 2-89 Figure 2-90 Figure 2-91 Figure 2-92 Figure 2-93 Figure 2-94 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 Figure 3-8 Figure 3-9 Figure 3-10 Figure 3-11 Figure 3-12 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-14 Figure 3-14 Figure 3-15 Figure 3-16 Figure 3-17 Figure 3-18 Figure 3-19 Figure 3-20 Figure 3-21 Figure 3-22 Figure 3-23 Figure 3-24 Figure 3-25 Figure 3-26 Figure 3-27 Figure 3-28 Figure 3-28 Figure 3-29 Title Page 156 157 157 158 159 160 160 162 163 164 164 166 167 168 168 170 172 174 178 179 181 183 184 189 190 192 193 195 201 202 203 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 211 212 217 218 220 221 223 230 231 232
Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PZ-M44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connections for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location for PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CFTB (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CK14 (OSC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDA-24296
LIST OF FIGURES Page v Revision 1.0

Figure Figure 3-29 Figure 3-30 Figure 3-31 Figure 3-32 Figure 3-33 Figure 3-34 Figure 3-35 Figure 3-36 Figure 3-37 Figure 3-38 Figure 3-39 Figure 3-40 Figure 3-41 Figure 3-42 Figure 3-43 Figure 3-44 Figure 3-44 Figure 3-45 Figure 3-45 Figure 3-46 Figure 3-47 Figure 3-48 Figure 3-49 Figure 3-50 Figure 3-51 Figure 3-52 Figure 3-53 Figure 3-54 Figure 3-55 Figure 3-56 Figure 3-57 Figure 3-58 Figure 3-59 Figure 3-60 Figure 3-61 Figure 3-62 Figure 3-63 Figure 3-64 Figure 3-65 Figure 3-66 Figure 3-67 Figure 3-68 Figure 3-68 Figure 3-69 Figure 3-70 Figure 3-71 Figure 3-72 Figure 3-72 Title Page 232 233 234 235 236 237 239 240 242 244 245 247 248 250 252 258 259 260 260 262 263 266 268 269 273 275 277 281 283 284 288 289 290 291 293 295 297 300 301 303 305 311 312 313 315 317 321 322
PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8COTBJ (8COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16 COTBE (16COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CS02-C (2ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CS08 (HMATI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CS08-B (HMATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CS33 (ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Desk Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8LCBR (8LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBE (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF FIGURES Page vi Revision 1.0
NDA-24296

Figure Figure 3-73 Figure 3-74 Figure 3-75 Figure 3-76 Figure 3-76 Figure 3-77 Figure 3-78 Figure 3-79 Figure 3-80 Figure 3-80 Figure 3-81 Figure 3-82 Figure 3-83 Figure 3-84 Figure 3-84 Figure 3-85 Figure 3-86 Figure 3-87 Figure 3-88 Figure 3-88 Figure 3-89 Figure 3-90 Figure 3-91 Figure 3-91 Figure 3-92 Figure 3-93 Figure 3-94 Figure 3-95 Figure 3-96 Figure 3-97 Figure 3-98 Figure 3-99 Figure 3-99 Figure 3-100 Figure 3-101 Figure 3-102 Figure 3-103 Figure 3-104 Figure 3-105 Figure 3-106 Figure 3-107 Figure 3-108 Figure 3-109 Figure 3-110 Figure 3-111 Figure 3-112 Figure 3-113 Figure 3-114 Figure 3-115 Title Page 323 325 327 330 331 332 334 335 340 341 342 344 345 350 351 352 354 355 358 359 361 362 366 367 368 370 371 378 379 381 382 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 394 396 397 398 399 400 403 405 406 408 409
Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBW (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBY(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-FCHA (FCH) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCH/HUB/DTI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCH Cascade Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24LCBV (LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outer View of LC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Running for LC Cable (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NCU Connector Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-M96 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDA-24296
LIST OF FIGURES Page vii Revision 1.0

Figure Figure 3-116 Figure 3-117 Figure 3-118 Figure 3-119 Figure 3-120 Figure 3-121 Figure 3-122 Figure 3-123 Figure 3-124 Figure 3-125 Figure 3-126 Figure 3-127 Figure 3-128 Figure 3-129 Figure 3-130 Figure 3-131 Figure 3-132 Figure 3-133 Figure 3-134 Figure 3-134 Figure 3-135 Figure 3-136 Figure 3-137 Figure 3-138 Figure 3-139 Figure 3-140 Figure 3-141 Figure 3-142 Figure 3-143 Figure 3-144 Figure 3-144 Figure 3-145 Figure 3-145 Figure 3-146 Figure 3-147 Figure 3-148 Figure 3-149 Figure 3-150 Figure 3-151 Figure 3-152 Figure 3-153 Figure 3-154 Figure 3-155 Figure 3-156 Figure 3-156 Figure 3-157 Figure 3-158 Figure 3-159 Figure 3-160 Title Page 411 417 418 424 425 433 435 436 439 440 443 444 445 446 448 450 453 455 459 460 461 462 464 466 468 475 476 479 481 485 486 487 488 490 492 496 497 499 501 506 507 509 511 517 518 519 521 523 527
Face Layout ofPA-8RSTK (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8RSTM (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8RSTY (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-SDTA (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection betweenPA-SDTA andPA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-SDTB (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-2CCHA (CCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24CCTA (24CCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-2DCHA (2DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-ILCG (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-4ILCH (4ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8ILCE-A (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-4DATA (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF FIGURES Page viii Revision 1.0
NDA-24296

Figure Figure 3-161 Figure 3-162 Figure 3-163 Figure 3-164 Figure 3-165 Figure 3-166 Figure 3-167 Figure 3-168 Figure 3-169 Figure 3-170 Figure 3-171 Figure 3-172 Figure 3-172 Figure 3-173 Figure 3-174 Figure 3-175 Figure 3-176 Figure 3-177 Figure 3-178 Figure 3-179 Figure 3-180 Figure 3-180 Figure 3-180 Figure 3-180 Figure 3-181 Figure 3-182 Figure 3-183 Figure 3-184 Figure 3-185 Figure 3-186 Figure 3-187 Figure 3-188 Figure 3-189 Figure 3-190 Figure 3-191 Figure 3-192 Figure 3-193 Figure 3-194 Title Page 531 533 537 541 543 545 546 548 550 554 556 564 565 566 567 568 569 571 573 576 577 578 579 580 582 583 589 590 592 594 596 602 603 605 607 609 615 616
Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-4DATB (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-4AMPC (4AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8TLTR (TLT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID 2W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REC/PGA Connector Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDA-24296
LIST OF FIGURES Page ix Revision 1.0
This page is for your notes.
LIST OF FIGURES Page x Revision 1.0
NDA-24296
LIST OF TABLES
Table Table 3-1 Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 Table 3-9 Table 3-10 Table 3-11 Table 3-12 Table 3-13 Table 3-14 Table 3-15 Title Page 248 264 354 357 361 441 442 445 467 474 493 528 536 538 584
Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATI Card Lamp Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital PAD Setting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDA-24296 (E)
CHAPTER 3 Page xi Revision 1.0
CHAPTER 3 Page xii Revision 1.0
NDA-24296 (E)
CHAPTER 1
1. GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
This manual provides circuit card descriptions for the NEAX2400 IPX system. This manual is for those persons involved in system setup and administration activities for the NEAX2400 IPX. For each circuit card the following items are explained: General function Slot to mount the circuit card Precautions for mounting the card Location of the electronic devices on the card surface Description of the LED Description of the switches Physical interface
The circuit cards explained in this manual are divided into two categories, the Control Circuit Cards and the Line/Trunk Circuit Cards. You can easily define the card category by the pull tab color of the circuit card. Control Circuit Card White or red pull tab circuit cards are categorized as control circuit card. Also, the circuit cards in the Central Processor Rack (CPR) have white or red pull tabs. Line/Trunk Circuit Card Blue or yellow pull tab circuit cards are categorized as line/trunk circuit cards.
Note:
This manual is intended to describe only the basic line/trunk interface circuit cards of the NEAX2400 IPX. When you use circuit cards not shown in this manual, you may refer to the NEAX2400 ICS Circuit Card Manual with the following changes: The line/trunk circuit card shown in the above mentioned manual is compatible with NEAX2400 IPX; however, the exceptions are PA-CS02-C (2AT1) and PA-CS08B (H/MATI). The external appearance of PIM U (which is the standard port interface module of NEAX2400 IPX) is the same as the PIM J of the NEAX2400 ICS. The PCM highway running in PIM is different. More details are explained in this manuals section on PH-PC36 (MUX).
NDA-24296
CHAPTER 1 Page 1 Revision 1.0
2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD The control circuit cards for the 1 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure 11. The control circuit cards for the 4 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown inFigure 1-2. The control circuit cards for the IPX-U system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure 1-3 and 1-4. As a general rule, the blue pull tab line/trunk circuit cards are mounted in the universal slots that are located in Slots 04 - 12 and 15 - 23 of the Port Interface Module (PIM). The yellow pull tab line/trunk circuit cards (MISC) are mounted in Slots 00 - 02 of the LPM. Additional GT/LANI cards are mounted in the CPR.
NDA-24296
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-SW10(TSW) PH-SW10(TSW) PA-PW55-A(PWR) PA-PW54-A(DPWR)
PIM0
BSCM 00 01 02 03 04 PH-PC40(EMA) (MISC) LPM (MISC) (IOC/MISC) PH-IO24(IOC)
Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System
NDA-24296
NEAX2400IMS (IPX) 4-IMG System B S C M
PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM IMG0
PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM IMG1
PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG2
IMG0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1)
PIM0
BSCM
00 01 02 03 04 (MISC) LPM (MISC) (IOC/MISC) PH-PC40(EMA) PH-IO24(IOC)
Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4)
NDA-24296
NEAX2400IMS (IPX) 4-IMG System B S C M
IMG1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-A(PWR0)
PA-PW54-A(PWR1)
PH-PC36(MUX)
PH-PC36(MUX)
PIM3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-A(PWR0)
PA-PW54-A(PWR1)
PH-PC36(MUX)
PH-PC36(MUX)
PIM2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-A(PWR0)
PA-PW54-A(PWR1)
PH-PC36(MUX)
PH-PC36(MUX)
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36(MUX)
PH-PC36(MUX)
PA-PW55-A(PWR0)
PA-PW54-A(PWR1)
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PW14(PWRSW)
PH-PW14(PWRSW)
(MISC)
(MISC)
(MISC)
(MISC)
(MISC)
(MISC)
PH-PC20(DLKC0)
PH-PC20(DLKC1)
PH-GT09(GT0)
PH-GT09(GT1)
PH-SW12(TDSW00)
PH-SW12(TDSW01)
PH-SW12(TDSW02)
PH-SW12(TDSW03)
PH-SW12(TDSW10)
PH-SW12(TDSW11)
PH-SW12(TDSW12)
PH-SW12(TDSW13)
PH-CK16/17(PLO0)
PH-CK16/17(PLO1)
TSWM
NDA-24296
NEAX2400IMS(IMX) NEAX2400 IMS (IPX) 4IMG-SYSTEM B S C M
IMG2
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Dummy/APM
NDA-24296
NEAX2400IMS(IMX) NEAX2400 IMS (IPX) 4IMG-SYSTEM B S C M
IMG3
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Dummy/APM
NDA-24296
NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM CMP DUMMY ISWM CMG SP CMG
PIM PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12
PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13
PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15
LMG 4 (0~3)
Note:
The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in the slot.

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5)
NDA-24296
NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM CMP DUMMY ISWM IMG0/4/8/12 SP CMG
LMG 4 (0 3)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1)
PIM0
BSCM
00 01 02 03 04 PH-PC43(EMA) PH-M22(MMC)
LPM
NDA-24296
LMG 4 (0 3)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)
PIM3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1)
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PW14 (PWRSW) PH-PW14 (PWRSW) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) PH-PC20 (DLKC0) PH-PC20 (DLKC1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)
TSWM0
Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5) CHAPTER 1 Page 10 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM
PIM
CMP DUMMY ISWM
PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12
IMG2/6/10/14
SP CMG
LMG 4 (0~3)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1)
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PW14 (PWRSW0) PH-PW14 (PWRSW1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-CK18 (CLK0) PH-CK18 (CLK1)
TSWM1
NDA-24296
PIM
CMP DUMMY ISWM
IMG3/7/11/15
SP CMG
LMG 4 (0~3)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
PIM0
Dummy
NDA-24296
IMG3/7/11/15
Dummy
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
IMG2/6/10/14
TSWM1
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
PZ-M565 (ISAGTA)
LMG 4 (0~3)
PZ-M565 (ISAGTA)
HSW10 (PU-SW01) TSW13 (PU-SW00-A) TSW12 (PU-SW00-A) TSW11 (PU-SW00-A) TSW10 (PU-SW00-A) PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) IOGT1 (PH-GT10) IOGT0 (PH-GT10) PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) TSW03 (PU-SW00-A) TSW02 (PU-SW00-A) TSW01 (PU-SW00-A) TSW00 (PU-SW00-A)
PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PC23 (LANI) PZ-PC23 (LANI)
PZ-PC22 (LANI) PZ-ME44 (MEM) PZ-ME44 (MEM)
PZ-PC22 (LANI)
PZ-PC23 (LANI)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.
IMG0/4/8/12
PZ-PC22 (LANI)
PZ-PC22 (LANI)
PZ-PC23 (LANI)
Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5)
00 01 02 03 04
PH-PC43 (EMA)
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES)
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
IMG1/5/9/13
TSWM0
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
DUMMY
ISWM
CMG
CMP
SP
00 01 02 03 04
HSW01 (PU-SW01) HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES) PWRSW1 (PH-PW14)
PH-PC43 (EMA) PH-IO24 (IOC) PH-IO24 (IOC) Note PH-M22 (MMC) PWRSW0 (PH-PW14)
IPX-UMG SYSTEM
NEAX2400 IPX
CMG
PH-DK10 (DSPC)
DUMMY
FANU
ISWM
CMP
SP
Note:
NDA-24296
PIM
PIM
PIM
PIM
LP
LMG 4 (0 3)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1)
PIM0
BSCM
00 01 02 03 04 PH-PC43(EMA) PH-M22(MMC)
LPM
NDA-24296
LMG 4 (0 3)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM3
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1)
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PW14 (PWRSW) PH-PW14 (PWRSW) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) PH-PC20 (DLKC0) PH-PC20 (DLKC1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)
TSWM0
NDA-24296
PIM
CMP DUMMY ISWM
IMG2/6/10/14
SP CMG
LMG 4 (0~3)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
PIM0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PW14 (PWRSW0) PH-PW14 (PWRSW1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-CK18 (CLK0) PH-CK18 (CLK1)
TSWM1
Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5) CHAPTER 1 Page 16 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
PIM
CMP DUMMY ISWM
IMG3/7/11/15
SP CMG
LMG 4 (0~3)
PIM3
PIM2
PIM1
PIM0
Dummy
NDA-24296
NDA-24296
CHAPTER 2
CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE
This chapter explains the following items for each Control Circuit Card. General Function Explains the general function and purpose of each control circuit card. Mounting Location/Condition Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) for each circuit card. If there are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face layout. Lamp Indications The names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed. Switch Settings Each circuit card's switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, their setting and its meaning, standard setting, etc. External Interface If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector lead locations and the connecting routes are shown. In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet, which may be used to record the switch settings, is provided at the end of the explanation for each circuit card.
NDA-24296
SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board
SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board
1. General Function The CPR in 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system consists of the following components. (a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZGT20) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI). (b) DSP: (c) FDD/HDD: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps. Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation. Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM.
To I/O local bus
(d) PWR:
HDD FDD To HUB To HUB LANI LANI DSP CPU CPR#0 To MISC bus
Figure 2-1 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR)
HDD DSP ISAGT ISAGT CPU CPR#1 FDD LANI LANI To HUB To HUB
NDA-24296
The CPR in IPX-UMG system consists of the following components. (a) CPU BOARD: Contains System Processor Unit (SP)/Common Main Processor Unit (CMP)/Local Processor Unit (LP), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain PCI MEM (PZ-ME44), the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/ PZ-GT20/PZ-M565) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19/PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI). (b) DSP: (c) FDD/HDD: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps. Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation. Note Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the SP/CMP/ LP.
(d) PWR:
Note:
FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG system.
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the Local Processor Module (LPM) as shown in Figure 2-2. Since the CPR provides the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the ISAGT and LANI cards are located in those busses respectively.
ISWM/PIM0 BSCM
LPM
PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) Note CPR PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD)

Note:
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.

Figure 2-2 CPR Location
NDA-24296
When the SN1695 CPRBF-A is used in the IPX-UMG system, the CPR is mounted on each processor module (SP, CMP, and LPs) as shown in Figure 2-3. As to the mounting location of PWR, FDD/HDD, DSP, and other circuit cards within the CPR, refer to Figure 2-5.
LMG0 3 CMG
00 0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00010203 04 05 06 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00010203 04 05 06 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
CMPCPR
LANI LANI ISAGT
LANI LANI ISAGT 00 0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23 0001020304
00 0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23
000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23
000102 03 04 0506 07 0809 10 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23
000102 03 04 0506 07 0809 10 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23
00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23
000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23
000102 0304 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23
000102 0304 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23
00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23
SPCPR
0001020304
LANI LANI ISAGT
LANI LANI ISAGT
LANI LANI ISAGT
0001020304
LANI LANI ISAGT
00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23
00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23
LPCPR
Figure 2-3 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
ISWM /Dummy /PIM0
SP/CMP /LP
CPR
PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) /PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Note 1 PZ-PC19/22/23 (LANI) Note 2
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Note 4 CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD) Note 3
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
Note 1: PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system or in IMG0/4/8/12 of IPX-UMG
system.
Note 2: The required LANI card and its mounting slot differs depending on each processor unit on which the
CPR is mounted within the IPX-UMG system. Refer to the explanation for PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23 card in this manual or Installation Manual.
Note 3: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG System. Note 4: PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) and PZ-M565 (ISAGT) cards are mounted on the CMP only. Figure 2-4 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The CPR contains the following lamps, switches and connectors. Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus.
[CPR for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]

PWR(PZ-PW92) FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28) DSP(PZ-DK224) Note
PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V SW I ON MBR O -48V OUT OFF
ON HDD
CPU OPE WDT IMG1 IMG2
IMG0 IMG3
5A 125V AC/DC OUTPWR
SYSTEM SELECT0
ON 1 4
STATUS
SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM

ON 1 ON 13 20 12
SENSE
SYSTEM SELECT2
CPURST
INPWR
ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Note:
This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.

Figure 2-5 Front View of CPR
NDA-24296
[CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System]

PWR(PZ-PW92) FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28) DSP(PZ-DK224) LANI(PZ-PC23) LANI(PZ-PC19)
ON HDD
IMG0 IMG3
SYSTEM SELECT0
ON 1 4
STATUS
SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM

ON 1 ON 13 20 12
SENSE
SYSTEM SELECT2
CPURST
INPWR
ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
ISAGT (PZ-GT13)
Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System
[CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System]

PWR(PZ-PW92) DSP(PZ-DK224) LANI(PZ-PC22)
PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V SW ON MBR O -48V OUT OFF
ON
ISAGTA (PZ-M565)
IMG0 IMG3
SYSTEM SELECT0
ON 1 4
STATUS
SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM

ON 1 ON 13 20 12
SENSE
SYSTEM SELECT2
CPURST
INPWR
ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
MEM(PZ-ME44)
ISAGT (PZ-GT13)
Figure 2-7 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System CHAPTER 2 Page 26 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
[CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System]

PWR(PZ-PW92) DSP(PZ-DK224) LANI(PZ-PC22)
ON
ISAGT (PZ-GT20)
Note
IMG0 IMG3
SYSTEM SELECT0
ON 1 4
STATUS
SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM

ON 1 ON 13 20 12
SENSE
SYSTEM SELECT2
CPURST
INPWR
ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
ISAGT (PZ-GT13)
Note:
This card is required when IMG2/6/10/14 and/or IMG3/7/11/15 is configured.

Figure 2-8 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
4.
Lamp Indications Lamp Indications vary depending on the node. The following shows the lamp indications for the CPR in the IMG for 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system. [Lamp Indications for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]
LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) HDD (FDD/HDD) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) Note:
COLOR Green Red Red Red Green Green Green Green Green Green
DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation. Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note
No lamp indication in STBY mode. The following shows lamp indications for the CPR in the ISW.
LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) HDD (FDD/HDD) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) Note:
COLOR Green Red Red Red Green Green Green Green Green
DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state. Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state. Flashes green when the CPU of the ISW is in stand-by state. Lights green when the TSW1 of the ISW is used. Note Lights green when the TSW2 of the ISW is used. Note Lights green when the TSW3 of the ISW is used. Note
No lamp indication in STBY mode.
NDA-24296
LAMP NAME
DESCRIPTION Two sets of 7-segment LED show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.
STATUS SENSE LEFT RIGHT DESCRIPTION
1. When Program Install F c d The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes execute) Findicated during HD format. cindicated when copying data from FD to HD 1 d indicated while making the directory on the HD 2. When Program Load Not used 1 After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to memory. 1 is indicated during this process. 3. On-line active CPR 0-9 0-9 S b y The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%) 4. On-line stand-by CPR The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates S, b, y 5. Program & Office data load Not used 1
0
Not used
STATUS (DSP)
Not used
1indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the memory 0 indicated during the Office data load cindicated when copying the data from FD to HD dindicated while making the directory on the HD The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart). 1indicated during the Program load. 0indicated during the process. F indicated during HD format. The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE. Hindicated during the ROM data loading.
3 4 5 6 C
Not used Not used Not used 1 Not used Not used
c d
F H
Note:
The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or E indicates the processing failed.
Segment Spinning Indication
NDA-24296
The following shows the lamp indication for the CPR in the SP, CMP, and LP for IPX-UMG system. [Lamp Indications for the CPR in SP]
LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) HDD (FDD/HDD) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) COLOR Green Red Red Red Green Green Green Green Green DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU of the SP is in active state. Remains OFF when the CPU is in active state. Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state. Not used. Not used. Not used.
[Lamp Indications for the CPR in CMP]

LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) Note: COLOR Green Red Red Green Green Green Green Green DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU of the CMP is in active state. Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state. Lights green when the TSW1 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note Lights green when the TSW2 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note Lights green when the TSW3 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note
NDA-24296
[Lamp Indications for the CPR in LP]

LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) Note: COLOR Green Red Red Green Green Green Green Green DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation. Flashes green when IMG1/5/9/13 is mounted. Note Flashes green when IMG2/6/10/14 is mounted. Note Flashes green when IMG3/7/11/15 is mounted. Note
NDA-24296
LAMP NAME
DESCRIPTION Two sets of 7-segment LED show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.
STATUS SENSE LEFT RIGHT DESCRIPTION
0-9
0-9 S b y 0-F
1. On-line active CPR The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%) 2. On-line stand-by CPR The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates S, b, y 3. Both active and stand-by CPR The setting of SENSE switch is indicated.
When the EMA SUP switch is OFF on the PHPC43 (EMA) card.
Not used 0 Not used
When the EMA SUP switch is ON on the PHPC43 (EMA) card.
STATUS (DSP)
Not used
4. Program & Office data load 1 indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the memory 0 indicated during the Office data load 1. When Program Install The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes execute) F indicated during HD format. c indicated when copying data from FD (Basic Software #1) to HD d indicated while making the directory on the HD 2. When Program Load After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to memory. 1 is indicated during this process. c indicated when copying the data from FD to HD
Not used 1
F c d
Not used
3 5
Not used Not used 1
c
0
The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart). 1 indicated during the Program load. 0 indicated during the process. The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE. H indicated during the ROM data loading.
Not used
Note:
The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or indicates E meaning the processing failed.
Segment Spinning Ind
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings [for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]

SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING
SWITCH NAME SW (PWR) MB Note (FDD/HDD) MBR (DSP) CPURST (DSP)
SETTING ON OFF ON (Up) OFF (Down) ON (Up) OFF (Down)
MEANING PWR is supplied to the CPR. PWR is not supplied to the CPR. Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.
Normal setting. Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is located.
Normal setting. Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting.
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Not used. Not used. Not used. Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected. Watchdog Timer time-out is detected. PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF. Fixed to OFF. IPX-U System 1IMG/4IMG System Not used.
SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP)
2 3 4
2 SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP)
4 5~7 8 SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) Note:
1~8
Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being accessed.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING HD formatted
MEANING The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.
File copied from FDD to HD Directory created on the HD
SENSE (DSP) Note
2 3 4 5 6 C
On-line mode. File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD. Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD. OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data. HD format of the FDD/HDD. The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.
Note:
The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.
NDA-24296
[for IPX-UMG System]

SWITCH NAME SW (PWR) MB Note (FDD/HDD) MBR (DSP) CPURST (DSP) SWITC H NO. SETTING ON OFF ON (Up) OFF (Down) ON (Up) OFF (Down) 1 2 SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) ON OFF ON 3 OFF 4 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON STANDARD SETTING MEANING PWR is supplied to the CPR. PWR is not supplied to the CPR. Make-busy of the FDD/HDD. Normal setting. Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is located. Normal setting. Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting. Fixed to ON. Fixed to OFF. High Density system configuration (one LP controls two IMGs) Standard system configuration (one LP controls four IMGs) Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected. Watchdog Timer time-out is detected. PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF. Fixed to OFF. Fixed to ON.
2 SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP)
4 5~7 8 Note:
Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being accessed. This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1~4
SETTING OFF
STANDARD SETTING Not used.
MEANING
Physical PBI Number (Equipment Number)

SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 PBI No.
SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP)
5~8
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
PBI 02 (SP) PBI 04 (CMP) PBI 30 (LP 00) PBI 38 (LP 04) Note PBI 40 (LP 08) PBI 48 (LP 12) Note PBI 50 (LP 16) PBI 58 (LP 20) Note PBI 60 (LP 24) PBI 68 (LP 28) Note
Note 1: Physical PBI No. must be the same
on the CPR of system #0 and #1 in dual configuration.

Note 2: This setting is required when the
system applies High Density system configuration (i.e., a LP controls two IMGs) only.
Note:
This switch setting is valid when the EMA SUP switch is ON (UP side).
NDA-24296
SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board Note:
Refer to the following figure and table for the PBI Number and the Equipment Number for IPX-UMG system. The same PBI Number must be assigned to both #0 and #1 processors in dual configuration.
IMG0 CMG CMP
IMG1
IMG2
IMG3
SP
LP00 IMG4 IMG5 IMG6 IMG7
LP24
Processor Name SP CMP LP00 (IMG0) LP08 (IMG4) LP16 (IMG8) LP24 (IMG12)
PBI No. 02 04 30 40 50 60
CPU Accommodation
Equipment No. 15 14 0 2 4 6
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SETTING 0 Note 2 1 Note 2
STANDARD SETTING On-line mode.
MEANING
The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD. 3 Note 2 5 Note 2 C Note 2 HD formatted File copied from FDD to HD Directory created on the HD
SENSE (DSP) Note 1
File copied from FDD to HD/Connection Hold Restart. Note 3 OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data. The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.
Note 1: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the
CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.
Note 2: This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only. Note 3: Connection Hold Restart is proceeded by initializing the system with the TOPU key.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
7.
Switch Setting Sheet
SWITCH NAME SW (PWR) MB (PWR:PZ-PW106) MB (FDD/HDD) MBR (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) SENSE (DSP)
SWITCH SHAPE
ON OFF ON
REMARKS
ON
ON
1234
ON
12345678
ON
12345678
ON
NDA-24296
PH-GT09 Gate
PH-GT09
Gate
1. General Function The PH-GT09 (GT) circuit card provides both the TSW I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface. The CPR controls TSW, PLO, DLKC, and MISC via the ISAGT and GT.
PLO1 PLO0 TDSW13 TDSW03 TDSW I/O Local Bus TDSW02 TDSW11 TDSW01 TDSW10 TDSW00 MISC Bus DLKC0 MISC GT GT DLKC1 TDSW12 TDSW I/O Local Bus
DSP
DSP
To HUB
LANI
CPU
ISAGT
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
To HUB
CPR #0 To HUB LANI MISC Bus
CPR #1 LANI MISC Bus To HUB
EMA
IOC/ MISC
Figure 2-9 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System
NDA-24296
PH-GT09 Gate
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.
Mounting Module TSWM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
GT1 GT0
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-10.
OPE/MB
MB MBR
Figure 2-10 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT)
NDA-24296
PH-GT09 Gate
4.
Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME OPE/MB
COLOR Green
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.
5.
Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING Make-busy of circuit card Normal setting
MEANING
MBR Note
When the ACT side of GTs MBR switch is flipped, the ST-BY side of TSW, DLKC, and GT is forced to switch over the ACT side. (When the TSW is dual configuration.) Normal setting.
Note:
Prior to extracting the GT card, flip the MBR switch on and then flip the MB switch on. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.
6.
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME MB
REMARKS
MBR
ON
NDA-24296
PH-GT10 Input Output Gate
PH-GT10
Input Output Gate
1. General Function The PH-GT10 circuit card provides the TSW I/O bus interface allowing the CPU board to control the TSW, HSW, and PLO cards in the Inter-node Switch Module (ISWM) of the ISW/CMG. This circuit card also is equipped with the copy function to be consistent with the data of TSW I/O bus in both systems (single/ dual). This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES (IOGT0) PH-GT10 (IOGT1) PH-GT10 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10
ISAGT BUS LANI LANI CPU ISAGT MISC IOC EMA MISC I/O BUS
ISAGT BUS
LPM LANI
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
Figure 2-11 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System
NDA-24296
ISAGT BUS P-BUS LANI LANI CPU ISAGT

MISC I/O BUS
ISAGT BUS MMC MISC EMA

MISC I/O BUS
CMP LANI P-BUS
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
ISAGT2
ISAGT2
PCI BUS
PCI MEM
PCI MEM
PCI BUS
Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
Mounting Module ISWM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-13.
OPE/MB
MB MBR
PWRALM CA4L COPY
Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME
COLOR Green
MEANING Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state. This circuit card is in ST-BY state. Lights when this circuit card is in Make-busy state. Lights when On-Board Power Supply for this circuit card is abnormal. Lights when 4 MHz clock supplied for Local I/O Bus is faulty. Lights when this circuit card is in COPY mode.
OPE/MB
OFF Red
PWRALM CA4L COPY
Red Red Green
5.
Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING Circuit Card Make-busy
MEANING
Circuit Card Make-busy cancel Make-busy request Make-busy request cancel
MBR
6.
7.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS
MBR
ON
NDA-24296
PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer
PA-PC94
Data Link Multiplexer
1. General Function This circuit card mainly provides the two functions: 1) collection of BLF/TGBL information (associated with Attendant/Desk Console operation) from DLKC cards of all nodes in an IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, and 2) distribution of the collected data to ATI cards of all nodes. While a DLKC card can manage this processing solely on an accommodated node basis, the use of this card makes possible the BLF/TGBL management even on a system basis, via the Inter-node Switch (ISW). Note that this card is mounted in a PIM of any node, and if necessary, can have an optional dual configuration. For details on BLF/TGBL information, refer to the following service features explained in the Feature Programming Manual. Busy Lamp Field-Flexible [B-2] Trunk Group Busy Lamp [T-9] This figure shows an example where a pair of DLMX cards (No. 0/No. 1 system) is accommodated in a PIM of LN0/LMG0. IPX-U System/IPX-UMG System
LN 0/LMG0
(DLMX 1)
OUT
(TSW 1)
TSW 0
ISW/CMG
TSW/HSW 1 TSW/HSW 0
LN 1/LMG1
(TSW 1)
TSW 0
ATI
DLMX 0 Note
IN
(DLKC 1) DLKC 0 ATI
(TSW 1)
(DLKC 1) DLKC 0
TSW 0
LN 2/LMG2
ATI
(DLKC 1) DLKC 0
: Circuit Card : Circuit Card (No. 1 System) : BLF/TGBL data from DLKC : BLF/TGBL data to ATI
ATI
(TSW 1)
TSW 0
LN 3/LMG3
: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC (No. 1 system) : BLF/TGBL data to ATI (No. 1 system) BLF: Busy Lamp Field - Flexible TGBL: Trunk Group Busy Lamp
(DLKC 1) DLKC 0
Note:
IN - DLMX card gathers BLF/TGBL information from DLKC card of each node, via ISW/CMG. OUT - DLMX card sends the collected BLF/TGBL information to ATI card(s) of each node, via ISW/ CMG.
Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 47 Revision 1.0
2.
Mounting Location/Condition When this circuit card is used in a single configuration. Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DLMX
Highway Block HW 0
DLMX
HW 1
DLMX
HW 2
DLMX
HW 6
DLMX
HW 7
DLMX
HW 8
Mounting Condition
Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above. To used this card, be sure to assign RT=938 on the ATRK command. Do not mount another line/trunk circuit card in a slot adjoining the DLMX card within the same Highway Block (HW) (i.e. do not mount other line/trunk card in the right side of the slot where a DLMX card is mounted). 5. Only one DLMX card can be mounted when the system is composed of single configuration.
When this circuit card is used in a dual configuration. Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DLMX #0
Highway Block
HW 0
DLMX #1
DLMX #0
HW 1
DLMX #1
DLMX #0
HW 2
DLMX #1
DLMX #0
HW 6
DLMX #1
DLMX #0
HW 7
DLMX #1
DLMX #0
HW 8
DLMX #1
Mounting Condition
Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A pair of DLMX card No. 0/No. 1 systems must be mounted in the same Highway Block (HW). This circuit card cannot be mounted in 32-port slot (10, 11,12, 21, 22, 23). This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above. To use this card, be sure to assign RT=938 on the ATRK command. A maximum two DLMX cards (a pair of DLMX card) can be mounted when the system is a dual configuration.
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps and Switches The face layout of lamps and switches is shown below.
OPE MB KEY
ACT LOAD PWALM MNT
MODE
Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX)
4.
Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:
PA-PC94 Lamp Indications Reference
LAMP NAME OPE ACT LOAD PWALM
COLOR Green Green OFF OFF Red
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Lights when this circuit card is in a active state. Off when this circuit card is in a stand-by state. Not used. Lights when OBP alarm
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH No.
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Circuit card make-busy. Circuit card make-busy cancel
0 1 MNT 2 3 0 1-7
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Fixed to OFF. Fixed to OFF. Fixed to OFF. Make-busy-request. Cancel the make-busy-request.
MODE
Standard setting. (TSW fixed connection) Not used.
6.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS
ON
MNT
3 2 1 0
MODE
NDA-24296
PA-PW54-A Dual Power
PA-PW54-A
Dual Power
1. General Function The PA-PW54-A (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The 48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.
PA-PW55-A (PWR)
PA-PW54-A (DPWR)
DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU CR (For LC) HOW REL SUB PWR HOW (For LC)
DC-DC
RGU
HOW REL SUB PWR
NFB
NFB
-48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL)
-48 V +80V (Option) Note
Note:
The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
(PA-PW54-A) DPWR
PIM
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-17.
PAPW54 -A
-48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC
SW4 -48V SW
5.0 A
FUSE FUSE
0.5 A
MB RST -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V
RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC 25A
SIDE VIEW
+80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM
FRONT VIEW
Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card
NDA-24296
) U P
4.
LAMP NAME +80V ON 48 V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPUALM DCALM RGUALM HOWALM
COLOR Green Green Green Green Green Red Red Red Red
STATE Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and 5 V are being output normally. Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or 5 V outputs alarm. Lights when RGU voltage alarm. Lights when howler alarm.
5.
Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches.
SWITCH NAME 48V SW
SWITCH No.
SETTING ON OFF PUSH ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION 48 V input power is supplied. 48 V input power is not supplied. Hardware reset of the circuit card.
RESET
Normal setting. Make-busy of the circuit card. Normal setting. Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz] Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]
MB
1 SW4 2
6.
External Interface No cable connections are required.
NDA-24296
7.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
48 V
RESET
MB
DOWN
Circuit card Make-busy cancel
1 ON
SW4
2
20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms]
NDA-24296
PA-PW54-B Dual Power
PA-PW54-B
Dual Power
1. General Function The PA-PW54-B (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM. The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card in the PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.
PA-PW55-B (PWR)
PA-PW54-B (DPWR)
DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU CR (For LC) HOW REL HOW (For LC) SUB PWR
DC-DC
RGU
HOW REL SUB PWR
NFB
NFB
-48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL)
Note:
Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DPWR (PA-PW54-B)
PIM
NDA-24296
3.
PAPW54 -B
SW4
-48V SW
5.0 A
FUSE FUSE
0.5 A
RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC
FRONT VIEW
Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card
NDA-24296
20A
SIDE VIEW
) U P
4.
Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
STATE Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and 5 V are being output normally. Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or 5 V outputs alarm. Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm. Lights in the case of howler alarm.
5.
SWITCH NAME 48V SW
SWITCH No.
SETTING ON OFF
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION 48V input power is supplied. 48V input power is not supplied. Hardware reset of the circuit card.
RESET
PUSH
Normal setting Make busy of the circuit card. Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz] Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]
MB
ON OFF ON
1 SW4 2
OFF ON OFF
6.
NDA-24296
7.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
48 V
RESET
MB
DOWN
Circuit card make busy cancel
1 ON
SW4
2
20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms]
NDA-24296
PA-PW55-A Power
PA-PW55-A
Power
1. General Function The PA-PW55-A (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the associated PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.
PA-PW55-A (PWR)
PA-PW54-A (DPWR)
DC-DC
RGU
HOW REL SUB PWR
NFB -48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL)
NFB
Note:
Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System
NDA-24296
PA-PW55-A Power
2.
Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PWR (PA-PW55-A) NDA-24296
PIM
PA-PW55-A Power
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.
PAPW55 -A
SW4 -48V SW
5.0 A
FUSE FUSE
0.5 A
RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC 25A
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card
NDA-24296
U P
PA-PW55-A Power
4.
STATE Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and 5 V are being output normally. Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or 5 V outputs alarm. Lights when RGU voltage alarm. Lights when howler alarm.
5.
SWITCH NAME 48 V SW
SWITCH No.
SETTING ON OFF PUSH
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION 48 V input power is supplied. 48 V input power is not supplied. Hardware reset of the circuit card.
RESET
Normal setting Make-busy of the circuit card. Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz] Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]
MB
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1 SW4 2
6.
NDA-24296
PA-PW55-A Power
7.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
48 V
RESET
MB
DOWN
Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
1 ON
SW4
2
20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms]
NDA-24296
PA-PW55-B Power
PA-PW55-B
Power
1. General Function The PA-PW55-B (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM. The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card in the associated PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.
PA-PW55-B (PWR)
PA-PW54-B (DPWR)
DC-DC
RGU
HOW REL SUB PWR
NFB -48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL)
NFB
Note:
Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System
NDA-24296
PA-PW55-B Power
2.
Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PWR (PA-PW55-B) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 67 Revision 1.0
PIM
PA-PW55-B Power
3.
PAPW55 -B
SW4
-48V SW
5.0 A
FUSE FUSE
0.5 A
RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC
FRONT VIEW
Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card
NDA-24296
20A
SIDE VIEW
) U P
PA-PW55-B Power
4.
STATE Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and 5 V are being output normally. Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or 5 V outputs alarm. Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm. Lights in the case of howler alarm.
5.
SWITCH NAME 48V SW
SWITCH No.
SETTING ON OFF PUSH
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION 48V input power is supplied. 48V input power is not supplied. Hardware reset of the circuit card.
RESET ON MB OFF ON 1 OFF SW4 2 OFF ON
Normal setting Make busy of the circuit card. Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz] Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]
6.
NDA-24296
PA-PW55-B Power
7.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
48 V
RESET
MB
DOWN
1 ON
SW4
2
20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms]
NDA-24296
PH-DK10 Display Panel Controller
PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller
1. General Function The main functions of the PH-DK10 card are as follows: (a) to send out the system operating status, alarm and clock information to the Display Panel. (b) to collect the MJ/MN/SUP alarm information occurs on CMG and each LMG. In addition, by the collected internal alarm information, this card controls the Audible and Visual Alarm Indicating Panel. (c) to collect the key information on the TOPU of CMG, then output it to EMA. (d) to send out the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal from this card on the CMG to each LP. Additionally, this card activates the communication between the processor in each LP and CMP, SP. This circuit card is used in the IPX-UMG system. Refer to the next page for the location of this circuit card within the system.
NDA-24296
CMG PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) ISEL LMG CMP PH-M22 PH-M22 PH-PC43 RECEIVER RECEIVER RELAY SP PH-DK10 PH-PC43 RECEIVER AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL PH-M22 SEL EMA RECEIVER PH-PC43 LMG RELAY DISPLAY PANEL (DSPP) PH-PC43
EMA
EMA
RELAY
EMA
RELAY
KEY INFORMATION ALM INFORMATION

Figure 2-24 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC)
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in slot No.00 on SP of CMG.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
DSPC
SP
CPRAS-A
CPRAS-A
3.
OPE/MB
MB CN8 CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0 To MMC on LPR (CMP/LP)
KEY
To PZ-DK222 on the TOPU of CMG
Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 73 Revision 1.0
4.
LAMP NAME OPE/MB
COLOR Green Red
STATE Lights when this circuit card is in operation. Lights when this circuit card is in Make Busy state.
5.
Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
Circuit Card Make-busy cancel
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface
DSPC (PH-DK10) : Slot No.00
Connected to DSPP SP MISC0A Connector (BASEU) RPT Terminal on front of the BASEU 68PH DSPALM CA MDF
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL MJ MN BELL
Installation Cable
REAR VIEW
01 02 03 04 05 -48V (RPT0)
01 02 03 04 05 G (RPT1) 68PH DSPALM CA and Installation Cable MDF 6-BELL

BELL MNA SUPA MJA
68PH DSPALM CA 68PH Connector Champ Connector

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 MPALM SUPA1 EXTA MNA1 BELL0 MJA1 MNA0 SUPA0 MJA0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 MPALM
SUPB1 MNB1 BELL1 MJB1 MNB0 SUPB0 MJB0
8-MNA 9-SUPA 10-MJA 33-MNB 34-SUPB 35-MJB RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V) MJ/MN/BELL
MNB SUPB MJB
Figure 2-26 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel
NDA-24296
7.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS
NDA-24296
PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller
PH-IO24
Input/Output Controller
1. General Function The PH-IO24 (IOC) circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which conforms to RS-232C, between external equipment such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), Station Message Detail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface (MCI), Property Management System (PMS). The relationship between the IOC card and the associated cards is as follows, when the CPU is in dual configuration.
Note:
Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.
CPU BOARD #0 I/O GT #0
CPU BOARD GT #1 #1 I/O
MISC EMA FDD/HDD #0 MISC/IOC MISC I/O BUS FDD/HDD #1
IOC
(RS-232C) x4 posts for MAT, SMDR, MCI, PMS, PRT
Figure 2-27 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The IOC cards can be placed in the shaded slots (02, 03) as shown below.
Note:
Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.
Mounting Module
LPM
00 01 02 03 04
IOC#1 IOC#0
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-28.
OPE MB MBR IOC ALM
PORT0 PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 SW50
Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card
NDA-24296
4.
Lamp Indications The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.
LAMP NAME OPE/MB
COLOR Green Red
DESCRIPTION This circuit card is operating normally. This circuit card is placed in the Make-busy state. Clock down WDT alarm occurs to the microprocessor. RS-232C signal status indication. n = port number (0-3)
IOC ALM PORT0 - PORT3 SDn RDn ERn DRn CDn
Red
Green Green Green Green Green
SD: RD: ER: DR: CD:
Send Data Receive Data Equipment Ready Data Ready Carrier Detect
5.
Switch Settings The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard setting, it is indicated with in the table below.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING Up Down Up Down
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION The circuit card is placed into Make-busy status. Cancellation of Make-busy. The circuit card is placed into Make-busy request status. Cancellation of Make-busy Request. This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #1. This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #0.
MBR
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Not used (For Business System Only). Free Wheeling with ACK signal (For Hotel System Only). Free Wheeling. Not used.
SW50
Not used.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface As illustrated in Figure 2-29, the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A cable is required to connect external equipment such as the MAT, SMDR, MCI, and PRT.
Securely insert the connector of the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A into the appropriate MISC connector. Refer to the table listed below. RS-232C cable (Note 2) MISC 3B/2B (Note 1) Backplane 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
AMP
Circuit #0
To RS-232C Terminal
TYP0
PH-IO24 (IOC)
AMP
TYP1 TYP0
Circuit #1
68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
Circuit #2
TYP1
MISC 3A/2A (Note 1) Circuit #3
Note 1: The relationship between the MISC connectors and the mounting slot of the IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card is shown below. Mounting Slot 02 #2, #3 #0, #1 03 #2, #3 MISC 3A Note 2: The type of cables varies depending on a connected terminal and/or whether modems are used or not. More detailed information on the connecting cables is explained in the Installation Procedure Manual. MISC 2A MISC 3B IOC Circuit Number #0, #1 MISC Connector MISC 2B
Pin 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
TYP0, 1 Connector Signal name Pin Signal name SD 26 RD 27 RS 28 CS 29 30 DR 31 SG 32 CD ER 33 34 PB/CI 35 RT ST1 36 37 ST2 38 39 40 41 42
TYP0, 1 Lead Accommodation
Figure 2-29 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC)
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
SWITCH NAME MB
MBR
ON 12 34
Meaning of SW50-1: ON: OFF: This card is used as the No. 1 circuit card. This card is used as the No. 0 circuit card.
SW50
NDA-24296
PH-M22 MMC
PH-M22
MMC
1. General Function The main functions of the PH-M22 circuit card are as follows: to collect key setting information on the TOPU of the ISW and send the information to the ISW/the other LNs, depending on the ISEL key setting on the ISW. (for IPX-U system) to collect various alarm information from all the IMGs/ISW and activate MJ/MN LED on the TOPU display. (for IPX-U system) to send out the key information to EMA within the same LMG (for IPX-UMG system) to collect the external MJ/MN alarm information output by EMA in each LMG (for IPX-UMG system)
This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

LN PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) PZ-DK227 (TOP KEY) ISEL PH-M22 PH-PC40 RECEIVER PH-M22 PH-PC40 RECEIVER
ISW
EMA
SEL
EMA RELAY
RELAY LN PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) PH-M22 PH-PC40 RECEIVER
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL
EMA
RELAY KEY INFORMATION ALM INFORMATION
Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System CHAPTER 2 Page 82 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
PH-M22 MMC
CMG PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) ISEL CMP PH-M22 PH-M22 PH-PC43 RECEIVER RECEIVER RELAY SP PH-DK10 PH-PC43 RECEIVER AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL PH-M22 SEL EMA RECEIVER PH-PC43 LMG RELAY DISPLAY PANEL (DSPP) PH-PC43
LMG
EMA
EMA
RELAY
EMA
RELAY
KEY INFORMATION ALM INFORMATION

Figure 2-31 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
PH-M22 MMC
2.
Mounting Module
LPM/CMP/LP
00 01 02 03 04
MMC CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A
CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A
3.
OPE
MB
CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0
KEY
Figure 2-32 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC)
NDA-24296
PH-M22 MMC
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green
STATE Lights when this circuit card is in operation.
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
Circuit Card Make-busy cancel
NDA-24296
PH-M22 MMC
6.
External Interface
MMC (PH-M22) : Slot No.00
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL LPM MISC0A Connector (BASEU) RPT Terminal on front of the BASEU 68PH EXMISC CA MDF MJ MN BELL
REAR VIEW
01 02 03 04 05 -48V (RPT0)
01 02 03 04 05 G (RPT1) 68PH EXMISC CA and Installation Cable MDF BELAA MNAA SUPAA MJAA MJ/MN/BELL
68PH EXMISC CA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
MPALM EXTAA BELAA MNAA SUPAA MJAA
MNBA SUPBA MJBA
MNBA SUPBA MJBA RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V)
Figure 2-33 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel Note:
External connection for Alarm Indicator is not used in IPX-UMG system.
NDA-24296
PH-M22 MMC
7.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS Note:
Normal operating mode is down.
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
PH-M16
Line Test
1. General Function This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscribers line. The circuit card supports sending Howler Tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, and send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.
Note:
A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of available lines within the line test/ automatic trunk test at the same time is only one.
TEL
LC TSW I N T
TEL
LC
PIM LPRA LTST

EXTENDED I/O BUS
TEST EQ
GT EXGT
CPU
EXTENDED I/O BUS
Figure 2-34 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below:
Note:
IPX: Slot 00, Slot 01, Slot 02. IPX-U: Slot 01, Slot 02 (Considering PH-M22 MMC)
Mounting Module
00 01 PH-M16 PH-M16 02 PH-M16 03 04
LPM
3.
OPE/MB MB
SW0
CRIN
Figure 2-35 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Note:
CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
4.
Lamp Indications
COLOR Green Red DESCRIPTION This circuit card is operating in normal mode. This circuit card is Make-busy.
LAMP NAME OPE/MB
5.
Switch Settings
SWITCH NO SETTING UP DOWN 1 ON ON ON OFF ON 4 OFF STANDARD SETTING MEANING Circuit card Make-busy Circuit card Make-busy cancel Setting of a condition of DT detection (440Hz+350Hz) Setting of a condition of RBT detection (440Hz+480Hz) Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67 msec.) Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133 msec.) Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone of ODT (Set soft control or E-wire loop-back) Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone of ODT (Set soft control only)
SWITCH NAME MB
2
3
SW0 5
BASIC INTERVAL TIMER SW0
5 ON ON
6 OFF ON ON ON
7 OFF OFF ON ON
8 OFF OFF OFF ON
TIME 8 16 32 64
ON ON
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
6.
External Interface
MISC Connector Accommodation Circuit Card Backboard Connector
Connector Name Slot Number

00 01 PH-M16 PH-M16 02 PH-M16 03 04
LPM
LPM Backboard MISC Circuit Card Backboard Connector MISC CONNECTOR 68PH EXMISC CABLE
MISC CONNECTOR
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TE TELB LCB THOWB THOWS SE ATB OUTB TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 TM TELA LCA THOWA ONHK TCR ATM ATA OUTA TA1
INB
INA
Figure 2-36 LT Connector Lead Accommodation
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
PBX
TM TE OUTA OUTA INA INB TA1 TB1
MDP
LTST
TLT
E M RA RB TA TB A B
LC
Figure 2-36 Connecting Route Diagram
7.
Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH SHAPE

ON (MB) OFF
SWITCH NAME
MB
REMARKS
ON
12 3456 78
SW0
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
PH-PC36
Multiplexer
1. General Function The PH-PC36 (MUX) circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or trunks. In between the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/trunk circuit, this circuit card provides an interface for PM control and management by the CPU. Likewise in between the TSW and the line circuit/trunks, this circuit card provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) information and digital data information.
MUX
PCM HW PM BUS
LC/TRK PM LC/TRK
PCM HW PM BUS
MUX
PM LC/TRK
MUX
PCM HW PM BUS
PM LC/TRK
TSW/INT/PLO CPR GT MUX
PCM HW PM BUS
PM
Figure 2-37 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
PCM HW MUX TDSW 13 TDSW 03 MUX MUX MUX PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW MUX TDSW 12 TDSW 02 CPR 1
ISAGT
Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM IMG 3 Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM
PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW
MUX MUX MUX
GT 1
CPR 0
ISAGT
GT 0 TDSW 11 TDSW 01
DLKC 1 DLKC 0
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW
MUX TDSW 10 TDSW 00 MUX MUX MUX
PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS
Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM
IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM
Figure 2-38 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
MUX00 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX01 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX02 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX03 LC/TRK LC/TRK
MUX10
MUX11
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX12
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
MUX13
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK TSW00 TSW10 DLKC0 LN/LMG MUX MUX TSW01 TSW11 DLKC1
LC/TRK
PLO 0 TSW02 TSW12
PLO 1
TSW03 TSW13
TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10
ISWM
TSW02 TSW12
TSW03 TSW13 PLO 0 PLO 1
Figure 2-39 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
The PCM highway running is illustrated in Figure 2-40. There are sixteen 2 Mbps PCM highways (HW0 HW15) in the PIM. Each PCM highway runs from a card slot to the MUX circuit card. For instance, highway number zero (HW0) appears in Slot 04 and also Slot 05, thus the HW0 carries the PCM of the Group number 0, 1, 2 and 3. Likewise, the HW6, 7, 14, 15 cover the group numbers 24 through 31. However, the time slots of Group number 24 and 25 are exclusively used for the Speech Path Memory (SPM). All highways in the PIM lead to a MUX card, so 512 time slots (32 time slots per highway 16 highways = 512 time slots) of PCM are multiplexed/de-multiplexed at a MUX and sent/received to/from the TSW circuit card across the 32.786 Mbps of the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS). Also the MUX card provides the PM bus interface. The CPR controls and administrates the PM of the line/ trunk circuit card via the TSW and the MUX. In addition, this circuit card supports 3-Party Conference (CFT) function and is equipped with eight circuits of 3-Party Conference. The CFT appear in Time Slots 8 through 31 of the HW13 (Group 21 - 23).
Slot number of the PIM U-A Group (G) number of the LENS 8 circuits of CFTs
00
01 PWR (24)
02
03 PWR (25)
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 15 14
11 19 18
12 23 22
13 MUX#0
14 MUX#1
15
16
17
18
19
20
21 15 14
22 19 18
23 23 22
11
11
1 0 27 26
HW0
3 2
5 4 29 28
HW1
HW6
HW7
7 6
9 8 31 30
HW2
10
10
HW3
13 12
13 12
21
17
HW4 HW8 27 HW9 29 HW10 31

HW11 HW12 HW13
17 16
HW5
21 20
HW14
0 26
16
20
28 HW15
30
Group 24 and 25 are used for the SPM
2 Mbps (32 time slots) of PCM highway
Figure 2-40 PCM Highway Running
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
2.
Mounting Location/Condition For the 1 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is mounted in the PIM 1, 2, and 3. For the 4 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is required in all PIMs.
Mounting Module PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
MUX #0 MUX #1
PIM
3.
MUXACT MB SYNC RCLK ALM PMCLK ALM CFT OPE ON OFF 4 3 2 1 SW01
MUX
Figure 2-41 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX)
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
4.
Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME MUX ACT SYNC RCLK ALM
COLOR Green Green Red
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state. Lights when 32 Mbps Frame Head (FH) synchronization is established between the MUX and TSW. Lights when the 32 Mbps clock signals (which is supplied by TSW) loss has occurred. Lights when either the following clock signals output failure has occurred. 2 Mbps clock signals (which supplies to the line/trunks) Frame Head signal 4 Mbps clock signals
PMCLK ALM
Red
CFT OPE
Green
Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH NO
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is valid. 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is invalid. Setting of A-Law in the CFT function block.
ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
SW01
2 3 4
Setting -Law in the CFT function block. Not used. Not used.
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
6.
External Interface For the 1 IMG system, the cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-42.
PIM 3 MT24 TSW CA-180 MUX #0 MUX #1
PIM 2 MT24 TSW CA-140
MUX #0
MUX #1
PIM 1
MT24 TSW CA-90 MUX #0 MUX #1
PIM 0
TSW #0
TSW #1
Figure 2-42 External Interface for PH-PC36
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
The cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-43. As seen in this illustration, the cable connected to the front of the MUX leads to the MUX### connector on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of the TSWM. See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for more details.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)
PIM
PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 LPM IMG0
PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 TSWM IMG1
PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 Dummy/APM IMG2
PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 Dummy IMG3
BWB of TSWM
Figure 2-43 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW
NDA-24296
PH-PC36 Multiplexer
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
ON
SW01
12 34
NDA-24296
PH-PC20 Data Link Controller
PH-PC20
Data Link Controller
1. General Function This circuit card simultaneously provides all Attendant Consoles (ATTs) in the system (except the 1-IMG system) with information such as the termination/answer/release (abandoned) information of ATT calls, or the station idle/busy information through the TSW system link.
TSW ATTCON ISAGT0 ISA BUS ISAGT1 ATTCON
CPU0 GT0 GT1
CPU1 Note
DLKC0
MISC I/O BUS
DLKC1
Figure 2-44 Location of PC-PH20 in the System Note:
MG = 01/03/05/07, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are used to input the information into TSW by the DLKC. Mounting Location/Conditions
2.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DLKC#0 DLKC#1
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-45.
OPE/MB MB PWR ALM
Figure 2-45 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card
4.
LAMP NAME
COLOR Green
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state. Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state or when the firmware is abnormal. Lights when the On-Board Power Supply located on this circuit card is abnormal.
OPE/MB PWR ALM
Red Red
5.
Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
6.
External Interface
NDA-24296
No cable connections are required. 7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
NDA-24296
PH-PC45 Emergency Alarm Controller
PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller
1. General Function The PH-PC45 (EMA) circuit card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the system, and sends out information about the detected alarm to the circuits concerned. This circuit card can activate the system MJ/MN LEDs on the TOPU. Additionally, this card can control the active/stand-by status of the CPU in the case of dual configuration. For the 1 IMG system, this circuit card has the Music-On-Hold sending function, too.
I/O Local Bus
I/O Local Bus
CPR #0
CPR #1 DSP DSP
CPU
GT
GT
CPU
EMA
MISC Bus # 0
IOC
MISC Bus # 1
MISC
Figure 2-46 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PH-PC45 (EMA) card is mounted in Slot 04 of the LPM, as shown below.
Mounting Module
LPM
00 01 02 03 04 PH-PC40 (EMA) PH-IO24 (IOC)
LPM
3.
OPE/MB
MB ACT1 CKERR1 ACT0 CKERR0 EMASUP EMASUP CPU SEL
SW65
NMI SEL SW73 SW92 SW70 SW A0
SW62
Figure 2-47 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE/MB ACT1 CKERR 1 ACT0 CKERR 0 EMSUP
COLOR Green Red Green Red Green Red Green OFF
STATE Indicates the circuit card is operating normally. Indicates the circuit card is in a Make-busy state. CPU #1 is in the ACT state. CPU #1 clock failure has occurred. CPU #0 is in the ACT state. CPU #0 clock failure has occurred. Disable the CPU change-over. (When EMSUP key is set upward .) Enable to the CPU change-over.
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN UP
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Make-busy of the circuit card. Normal setting. Make-busy of the CPU change-over circuit.
EMASUP DOWN UP CPUSEL MIDDLE DOWN UP NMISEL DOWN Note:
Normal setting. Forced activating the CPU #1.
Denial of the forced CPU selection. Note Forced activating the CPU #0. Outputs the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.
Outputs the RST (Reset) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.
Set CPUSEL switch downward, if a single CPU system.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Power Shut Down (PSDN) function (used in Australia only)

SW62 ON OFF
2 OFF SW62 ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF SW65 ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF SW70 ON 2 OFF ON 1 OFF SW73 ON 2 OFF
SW62-1 SW62-2
IMG#0 valid IMG#1 valid IMG#2 valid IMG#3 valid
IMG0# invalid IMG1# invalid IMG2# invalid IMG3# invalid
SW62-3 SW62-4
Output the CPU-ACT Signal to the another EMA (when this circuit card is used in the one frame stack configuration). CPU-ACT Signal does not output. Not used. Not used. Dual CPU configuration. Single CPU configuration. PZ-DK223 (or PZ-DK173) is used for the DSPP on the TOPU. PZ-DK179 is used for the DSPP on the TOPU. External music on hold source (FM lead) is used. Internal music on hold source IC is used. Output the alarm information for the external indicator (used in Australia only). Alarm information does not output. Power Failure Transfer (PFT) control is valid. PFT control is invalid. -law PCM CODEC is applied for the music. A-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
SW92-2
MEANING
SW92-1
Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)
OFF ON
OFF OFF ON
600 8.2 47K
2 SW92 Note 3
OFF
SW92-1
SW92-2
OFF ON
OFF OFF ON
600 8.2 47K
OFF
MUSIC CH0 selection. This selection is valid when SW70-1 is OFF. 1

SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC
OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF ON OFF
Fr Elise Maidens prayer Buzzer Chime
ON Dont care
3 SWA0 Note
Dont care
ON 4 OFF 5 6 7 ON 8 OFF
Not used Not used
MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card.
Not used Not used
Note:
SW92 and SWA0 are used in the 1 IMG system only.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface External equipment may be connected to this circuit card. The physical connection diagram for the external equipment for Music-On-Hold and External Alarm is shown in Figure 2-48.
EMA (Slot No.04)
EALM Connector Installation Cable AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL MDF MJ MN BELL RPT Terminal on front of the BASEU
LPM
16PH EXALM CA (BASEU)
REAR VIEW
01 02 03 04 05 -48V (RPT0)
01 02 03 04 05 G (RPT1)
CABLING DIAGRAM
16PH EXALM CA 26 E 1 2 27 E 28 3 4 29 MJB 30 MNA 5 31 6 7 32 33 8 34 9 50 EXTA 25
FM0 FM0 FM1 MPALM MJA MNA BELL E MJA MNA BELL MJB MNB RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V) EXTB CROSS CONNECTION
MDF
EXTERNAL MUSIC SOURCE MJ/MN/BELL
Figure 2-48 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
EMA-SUP
ON
CPU-SEL
ON
NMI-SEL
ON
SWA0
12 34 56 78
ON
12 34
ON
SW62
12 34
ON
SW65
12
ON
SW70
12
ON
SW73
12 34
ON
SW92
NDA-24296
PH-PW14 Power Switch
PH-PW14
Power Switch
1. General Function This circuit card is a power supply card that supplies DC -48 V operating power to the circuit cards mounted in the TSWM. It also provides the DC-DC converter function which generates output power DC +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V to MISC slots. The two PWR SWs cards make the power supply redundant.
FUSE
PWR SW #0 FET Switch
PWR SW #1 FUSE
Load Controller -48V IN Switch DCDC DCDC Controller
Load
-48V
Figure 2-49 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following shaded slots (00, 01).
Mounting Module TSWM/ISWM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PWR SW#1 PWR SW#0
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-50.
P-ON ALM
SW
-48V in Fuse (125V AC/DC 15A)
Figure 2-50 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME P-ON ALM
COLOR Green Red
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when SW switch is set at OFF position or it is faulty.
5.
Switch Settings Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING The card supplies the operating power to various circuit cards.
ON SW OFF
6.
7.

SWITCH NAME
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
00 01
ON
SW
-48 V operating power is supplied to various circuit cards.
NDA-24296
PH-SW10 Time Division Switch
PH-SW10
Time Division Switch
1. General Function This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) with INT, PLO, MUX, and CFT. The TSW capacity is 20482048 time slots, and it allows non-block switching for the maximum IPX configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the Port Microprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit cards via the PM BUS.
[Connection diagram of the TSW]
MUX PCM HW PM BUS LC/TRK
TSW/INT/PLO CPR GT MUX
PCM HW PM BUS
LC/TRK
[Function block diagram]
From EMA MUSIC
TSW INT D T G
LVDS
MUX
MUX
LC/TRK
PLO
CFT
PH-SW10 DTI DCS
Figure 2-51 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System
NDA-24296
Figure 2-52 shows the clock signal routing around the Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO).
OSC#1 (PA-CK14)
DCS 1
PLO
TSW
TSW#1 (PH-SW10) DCS 0 DCS 0 DIU 0 DIU 1 DIU 2 DIU 3 DCS 1 PLO TSW
TSW#0 (PH-SW10) OSC#0 (PA-CK14) Multiple connection on MDF
Figure 2-52 PLO Function Diagram
When the system operates as the clock source office of the digital network, the OSC (PA-CK14) card is required, and the OSC supplies the high-precision clock signals (0.3 ppm deviation) for the base clock of the PLO. When the system operates as the clock subordinate office, the TSW internal oscillator (5 ppm deviation) can be the base clock of the PLO. The source clock of the subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When the clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1. DCS0 2. DCS1 3. DIU0 4. DIU1 5. DIU2 6. DIU3 7. Drifting with the TSW internal oscillator
NDA-24296
The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: 32.768 MHz CLK 8 KHz FH 5 msec n FH (for wireless module).
The MUX performs multiplexing/de-multiplexing of the 2 Mbps PCM highways running in PIM 0, and it sends/receives the PCM to/from the TSW, and operates like the MUX card of PIM 1/2/3. This circuit card includes the Digital Tone Generator (DTG) and hold tone (MUSIC) insertion circuit. The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tone, and the hold tone is supplied from the EMA card. In addition, the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory: SPM) can be inserted as a tone/music voice prompt. (For example, you can join the SPM and a DAT port by the nailed down connection, and the DAT's voice prompt is given to the system instead of ordinary tone/music.) Additionally, this circuit card supports the CFT (3-Party Conference) function and is equipped with eight circuits of 3-Party Conference Trunk.
[Voice Prompt sending for Tone] Speech Path Memory TONE ROM Tone source selected by office data Tone [Voice Prompt sending for Music] Speech Path Memory MUSIC from EMA Music source selected by office data Music
[Time Slot for Speech Path Memory] [SPM for music channel 16-29] MG=01, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7 MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-5 Note PIM 3
[SPM for music channel 0-15] MG=01, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7 MG=01, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7 PIM 2
[SPM for Tone channel 16-31] MG=00, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7 MG=00, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-7 PIM 1
[SPM for Tone channel 0-15] MG=00, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7 MG=00, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7 PIM0
Note: MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=6-7 are not used.

Figure 2-53 Voice Prompting NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 117 Revision 1.0
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in PIM number zero (0) of the slot shown below.
Mounting Module PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW #0 TSW #1
PIM0
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-54.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TSWACT MUXACT PLOACT MB TSWMBR
SW11
SW12
M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY CFT
PLOMB
PMCA PMJ PMN
SYNC ICK ECK SW03
SW04
MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
Figure 2-54 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME
COLOR Green
STATE Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state. Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state. Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side. Remains lit while MUX block is in ACT state. Remains lit while PLO block is in ACT state. Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX #2 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX #1 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX #0 synchronization has been established. Lights when the PM/PCM bus clock FH failure has occurred. Lights when the CFT circuit is valid. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office 32.768 MHz output clock failure 8 KHz output FH failure 5 msec n output FH failure Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Both internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) and high-precision clock signals (0.3 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed Drifting failure Internal OSC (5 ppm) failure High-precision clock signals (0.3 ppm) failure
TSWACT
Red Off
MUXACT PLOACT M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY PMCA CFT
Green Green Green Green Green Green Red Green
PMJ
Red
Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: PMN Yellow
NDA-24296
PH-SW10 Time Division Switch LAMP NAME COLOR Green SYNC STATE Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when any of the following have occurred. OFF DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. Drifting failure
Lights when the TSW (PA-SW10) internal oscillator is operating normally. ICK Green Note 1: The ICK LED will illuminate even when the internal PLO circuit is operational. Lights when the high-precision clock signals are received from OSC circuit card (PA-CK14). Note 2: The ICK LED will not illuminate when the PA-CK14 is operational.
ECK
Green
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN UP
STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy.
MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy cancel. TSW Make-busy request.
TSWMBR DOWN UP PLOMBR DOWN SW12 1-F
TSW Make-busy request cancel. PLO Make-busy request.
PLO Make-busy request cancel. Fixed to 1.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is valid. 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is invalid. Setting of A-law in the CFT function block.
2 OFF SW03 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF SW04 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF Note:
Setting of -law in the CFT function block. Fixed. Only MUX function is valid (If this card is mounted in PIM 1/2/3). Note
TSW/INT/PLO/MUX are valid (When this card is mounted in PIM 0). DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. DIU 0 is not used. DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. DIU 1 is not used. DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. DIU 2 is not used. DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. DIU 3 is not used.
1.5 M clock for DIU 0 2 M clock for DIU 0
When MUX card mode (SW03-4 ON), only MUX and CFT functions are valid. MUX 1 is used for a connection to TSW (Dont use MUX 2, 3). The LED of MUXACT, M0SY, CFT, and PMCA are valid, other LED is not lit. In this mode, only SW03 is valid.
NDA-24296
PH-SW10 Time Division Switch SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF SW11 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF 8 OFF When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. This card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. This card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card. (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is FE) (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is FF) Not used 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. PLO operates as the clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. STANDARD SETTING
SETTING ON
MEANING PLO operates as the clock subordinate office.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface When this circuit card is used in clock subordinate office, clock signals from DTI, CCT, PRT must be extracted. See Figure 2-56 for more information. When this circuit card is used in clock source office, cable connections are not necessary.
Mounting Module
PIM
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
DCSB0 DIU0B0 DIU1B0 DIU2B0 DIU3B0 SYN0B0 SYN1B0
DCSB1 DIU0B1 DIU1B1 DIU2B1 DIU3B1 SYN0B1 SYN1B1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
DCSA0 DIU0A0 DIU1A0 DIU2A0 DIU3A0 SYN0A0 SYN1A0
DCSA1 DIU0A1 DIU1A1 DIU2A1 DIU3A1 SYN0A1 SYN1A1
Figure 2-55 PLO Connector Leads Location
NDA-24296
PBX
MDF
CCT/DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
CCT/DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
CCT/DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
CCT/DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
TSW #0
DCSA0 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0
DCS
TSW #1
Note:
The following circuit cards have Clock Output leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (A-24PRT, PA-PRTC).
NDA-24296
The front cable connections are shown in Figure 2-57.
PIM 3 MT24 TSW CA-180 MUX #0 MUX #1
PIM 2 MT24 TSW CA-140
MUX #0
MUX #1
PIM 1
MT24 TSW CA-90 MUX #0 MUX #1
PIM 0
TSW #0
TSW #1
Figure 2-57 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
TSWMBR
ON
PLOMB
ON
12 34
ON
SW03
12 34 5 678
ON
SW04
12 34 5 678
ON
SW11
SW12
NDA-24296
PH-SW12
1. General Function This circuit card provides the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the system. Each TSW card is capable of 8192 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for an Interface Module Group (IMG). Four cards allow 8192 8192 TS switching for the 4 IMG configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administers the Port Microprocessor (PM) for line/trunk circuit cards.
[TSW configuration]
IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
TSW (8Kx2K)
IMG0
TSW (8Kx2K)
IMG1
TSW (8Kx2K)
IMG2
TSW (8Kx2K)
IMG3
[INT configuration]
ACT CPU1(LP) ISAGT1 GT1 I/O BUS TSW1 (INT) MUX00 System #1 System #0 MUX31 ISA BUS CPU0(LP) ISAGT0 I/O BUS GT0 STBY ACT TSW0 (INT) MUX30 ACT PM BUS LC/TRK(PM) STBY ACT STBY MUX01 PM BUS LC/TRK(PM) STBY
ISA BUS
Figure 2-58 TSW Configuration
NDA-24296
The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tones, such as Dial Tone, Busy Tone, Ring Back Tone, etc. The music on hold source, either the MUSIC ROM or the external source via FM lead, is located on the PLO card. The tone and the music are inserted into their time slot at this circuit card. Additionally, this circuit card provides the Voice Prompt function that inserts the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory : SPM) into the tone or music time slot.
FM MUSIC ROM
SEL
PLO#1 FM MUSIC ROM TONE ROM PLO#0 SEL SEL TONE ROM Music/Tone TDSW1 SEL SEL Music/Tone TDSW00 Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone SEL
Figure 2-59 Music/Tone Insertion
NDA-24296
[SPM for music channel 16-29] MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-5 Note [SPM for music channel 0-15] MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 [SPM for tone channel 16-31] MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 [SPM for tone channel 0-15] MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 PIM0 PIM 1 PIM 2 PIM 3
Note :
MG = 01,Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are exclusively used by the DLKC.
Figure 2-60 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. The IPX-U system accommodates two TSWMs (TSWM0/1).
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03 TSW 10 TSW 11 TSW 12 TSW 13
TSWM
NDA-24296
The definitions for the TSW00 - TSW03/TSW10 - TSW13 are listed below. 4-IMG System
SYMBOL TSW00 TSW01 0 TSW02 TSW03 TSW10 TSW11 1 TSW12 TSW13 IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 0 IMG 1 SYSTEM CONTROLLED IMG IMG 0 IMG 1
IPX-U system This card is mounted in the TSWM0/1 for the IPX-U system. For the card in TSWM0
SYMBOL TSW00 Collects the PCM data TSW01 0 TSW02 Sends the PCM data to the ISW TSW03 TSW10 Collects the PCM data TSW11 1 TSW12 Sends the PCM data to the ISW TSW13 IMG 1 IMG 0 IMG 1 IMG 1 IMG 0 IMG 0 IMG 1 SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG IMG 0
NDA-24296
For the card in TSWM1

SYMBOL TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03 TSW10 TSW11 TSW12 TSW13 1 Sends the PCM data to the ISW 0 Sends the PCM data to the ISW SYSTEM FUNCTION Collects the PCM data CONTROLLED IMG IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3
Collects the PCM data
3.
TSWACT
MB TSWMBR
M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY PLO 1 PLO 0
TONE
Figure 2-61 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME
COLOR Green
STATE Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state. Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state. Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side. Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX#2 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX#1 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX#0 synchronization has been established. Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 1. Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 0.
TSWACT
Red Off
M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY PLO 1 PLO 0
Green Green Green Green Green Green
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN UP
MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy cancel. TSW Make-busy request.
TSWMBR DOWN SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 TONE 2
TSW Make-busy request cancel. STANDARD SETTING Fixed. (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is FE.) (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is FF.)
SETTING OFF ON OFF
MEANING
6.
External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for information about the cable connection to MUX.
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
ON
TSWMBR
TONE
1 2
ON
NDA-24296
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A Time Division Switch
PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
1. General Function The PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A circuit card provides the Time division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. Each circuit card provides switching for a Local Node (LN) and four PUSW00/PU-SW00-A cards and two PU-SW01 (HSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 time slot (TS) switching for four (4) LNs/LMGs. This circuit card is located in ISWM of the ISW/CMG.
[TSW Configuration]
32M SERIAL HW 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX01 MUX11 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX00 MUX10 2M PCM HW x8 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX02 MUX12
2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK
MUX03 32M TSW Matrix HW
MUX13
TSW00 TSW10
32M TSW Matrix HW
DLKC0 MUX MUX TSW01 TSW11 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 0 TSW02 TSW12 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 1 DLKC1
32M SERIAL HW x4
TSW03 TSW13 32M SERIAL HW x4
32M SERIAL HW x4 TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10
32M SERIAL HW x4
TSW02 TSW12
TSW03 TSW13
64KHz Clock
PLO 0
32.768MHz Clock
32.768MHz Clock
PLO 1
64KHz Clock
Figure 2-62 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)
NDA-24296
[INT Configuration] ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES IOGT0 IOGT1 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10
ISAGT BUS
LPM LANI
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System
NDA-24296

MISC I/O BUS

MISC I/O BUS
CMP LANI P-BUS
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
ISAGT2
ISAGT2
PCI BUS
PCI MEM
PCI MEM
PCI BUS
Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
2.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW (00) TSW (01) TSW (02) TSW (03) TSW (10) TSW (11) TSW (12) TSW (13)
3.
Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-64.
TSWACT TSW MB TSW MBR

PWPALM HCKALM LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 LN20 LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00
1 2 3 4
SWE5
Figure 2-64 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME COLOR Green TSWACT Red PWPALM HCKALM LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 LN20 LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00 Red Red Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Lights when the TDSW block is active.
STATE
Lights when the TDSW block is in Make-busy state. Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (+5V) for this circuit card is abnormal. Lights when clock failure (clock down or FH output failure) occurs on the HSW card. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME TSW MB
SETTING UP DOWN UP
MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Circuit card Make-busy request.
TSW MBR DOWN
Circuit card Make-busy request cancel.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING LN (Local Node)/LMG (Local Module Group) connection mode. MUX connection mode. Not used. Not used. Not used.
SWE5
2 3 4
6.
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
TSW MB
ON
TSW MBR
NDA-24296
PU-SW01 Highway Switch
PU-SW01
Highway Switch
1. General Function The PU-SW01 circuit card, which is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, supports the following functions. (a) The switch composition is T-T-S-T (T: Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the space division is composed with this circuit card. (b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from and sends 8 highways to TSW by one card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by 2 PU-SW01 cards.
[TSW Configuration]
32M SERIAL HW 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX01 MUX11 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX00 MUX10 2M PCM HW x8 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX02 MUX12
MUX03 32M TSW Matrix HW
MUX13
TSW00 TSW10
32M TSW Matrix HW
DLKC0 MUX MUX TSW01 TSW11 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 0 TSW02 TSW12 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 1 DLKC1
32M SERIAL HW x4
TSW03 TSW13 32M SERIAL HW x4
32M SERIAL HW x4 TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10
32M SERIAL HW x4
TSW02 TSW12
TSW03 TSW13
64KHz Clock
PLO 0
32.768MHz Clock
32.768MHz Clock
PLO 1
64KHz Clock
Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW)
NDA-24296
ISAGT BUS
LPM LANI
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System
NDA-24296

MISC I/O BUS

MISC I/O BUS
CMP LANI P-BUS
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
ISAGT2
ISAGT2
PCI BUS
PCI MEM
PCI MEM
PCI BUS
Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in ISWM located in the ISW/CMG. The mounted slots are the shaded parts shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
HSW (00) HSW (01) HSW (10) HSW (11)
3.
Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-66.
HSWACT MB
PWRALM
CKALF CKALE CKALD CKALC CKALB CKALA CKAL9 CKAL8 CKAL7 CKAL6 CKAL5 CKAL4 CKAL3 CKAL2 CKAL1 CKAL0
Figure 2-66 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME HSWACT
COLOR Green Red Lights when the HSW block is active.
STATE
Lights when the HSW block is in Make-busy state. Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (-48 V) for this circuit card is abnormal. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
PWPALM CKALF
Red Green Off Green
CKALE Off Green CKALD Off Green CKALC Off Green CKALB Off Green CKALA Off Green CKAL9 Off Green CKAL8 Off Green CKAL7 Off Green CKAL6 Off Green CKAL5 Off Green CKAL4 Off
NDA-24296
PU-SW01 Highway Switch LAMP NAME CKAL3 Off Green CKAL2 Off Green CKAL1 Off Green CKAL0 Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock failure occurs on #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM. COLOR Green STATE Lights when the clock signal is sent normally from #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM.
5.
Switch Settings Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
6.
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
NDA-24296
PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
PZ-GT13
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function The PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) circuit card controls the TSDW, DLKC, PLO etc. using the PH-GT09 (GT) in the TSWM. This card also provides the MISC I/O bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control EMA and IOC/MISC. The Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR.
PLO1 PLO0 TSW13 TSW03 TDSW I/O Local Bus TSW02 TSW11 TSW01 TSW10 TSW00 TSW12 TDSW I/O Local Bus
MISC
DLKC0
DLKC1
GT
GT
DSP
DSP
To HUB
LANI
CPU
ISAGT
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
To HUB
CPR #0 To HUB LANI MISC I/O Bus
CPR #1 LANI MISC I/O Bus To HUB
EMA
IOC/ MISC
Figure 2-67 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
NDA-24296
ISAGT BUS LANI LANI CPU (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 MISC IOC EMA MISC I/O BUS
ISAGT BUS
LPM LANI
(ISAGT) PZ-GT13
CPU
LANI
Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW)
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT13 is located on the ISA bus which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-69.
Mounting Module
LPM
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD) PZ-DK224 (DSP)
Figure 2-69 External Interface for PZ-GT13
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-70. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE
PMG CONN
DSPP
A B
FRONT VIEW
Figure 2-70 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
4.
External Interface This card has no lamps.
5.
Switch Settings No switch settings are required.
6.
7.
Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.
NDA-24296
PZ-GT16
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) circuit card provides both the I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control the lower echelons of circuit cards. The Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR.
TSW
TSW
I/O Local Bus
I/O Local Bus
DSP
DSP
To HUB
LANI
CPU
ISAGT
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
To HUB
To HUB
LANI CPR#0 CPR#1
LANI
To HUB
MISC Bus EMA
MISC Bus
IOC/ MISC
Figure 2-71 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-72.
Mounting Module
LPM
PZ-GT16 (GT) PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)
Figure 2-72 External Interface for PZ-GT16
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-73. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE
PMG CONN A B FRONT VIEW
DSPP
4.
Lamp Indications This card contains no lamps.
5.
6.
7.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 151 Revision 1.0
PZ-GT20 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
PZ-GT20
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function The main function of the PZ-GT20 circuit card is to connect the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus located on the CPU and the Local I/O bus, permitting the microprocessor on the CPU to control the TSW, MUX cards of IMG2, 3/6, 7/10, 11/14, 15 via the PH-GT09 card in the TSWM1. This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 CLK 1 TSW I/O BUS CLK 0
TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10
TSW I/O BUS
PH-GT09 (IOGT0)
PH-GT09 (IOGT1) TSWM#1 (IMG2/6/10/14) TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 PLO 0 MISC TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10
GT-BUS
PH-GT09 (IOGT0)
PH-GT09 GT-BUS (IOGT1) TSWM#0 (IMG1/5/9/13)
ISA BUS LANI LANI CPU#0
PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
MMC EMA IOC/ MISC
PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
ISA BUS LANI CPU#1 LANI
LPM (IMG0/4/8/12)
Figure 2-74 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) CHAPTER 2 Page 152 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT20 resides on the ISA bus that is located in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-75.
Mounting Module LP(IMG0/4/8/12)
PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19/PC22 (LANI)
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD)
Note:
FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of LP in IPX-UMG system. Figure 2-75 External Interface for PZ-GT20
3.
Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors are shown in Figure 2-76. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE
NDA-24296
4.
External Interface This card contains no lamps.
5.
6.
7.
NDA-24296
PZ-M565 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
PZ-M565
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function This circuit card has the relay functions as mentioned below: (a) to receive the NMI (Non-Maskable Interruption) signal from the PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card, then output it to ISA Bus. (b) to receive the ACT signal from the EMA card, then output it to PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card. This card is used in IPX-UMG system connecting the two cards on CPU#0 and #1 in CMP with a bus cable.
PCI BUS
PCI MEM ISA BUS PZ-M565 (ISAGT2) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) EMA MISC DSPC /MMC PZ-M565 (ISAGT2) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PCI MEM ISA BUS
PCI BUS
LANI LANI CPU#0 CPU#1
LANI LANI
CMP
Figure 2-77 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-M565 (ISAGT) card is mounted in PCI Slot No.05 on CPU Board within the CMP of IPX-UMG system as shown in Figure 2-78.
CMP-CPR
PZ-PW92
DC-40V SW ON I -58.6 CPUOPE WDT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2 O OFF 5A 125V AC/DC
IMG3
5.0 A
PALM
OUTPWR ON ALM INPWR
PZ-M565
PCI bus
ISA bus
Figure 2-78 External Interface for PZ-M565
NDA-24296
PZ-M565 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
3.
Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors is shown below.
CONN
Figure 2-79 Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card
4.
Lamp Indications This card contains no lamps.
5.
6.
External Interface See the NEAX 2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.
7.
NDA-24296
PZ-ME44 PCI Memory
PZ-ME44
PCI Memory
1. General Function Mounted on CPU Board of CMP in IPX-UMG system, this circuit card provides the Memory Copy function related to ACT/ST-BY system changeover.
I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus
CPR #0 PCI MEM

DSP DSP
CPR #1 PCI MEM
CPU
ISAGT
ISAGT
CPU
ISAGT2
ISAGT2
EMA MISC Bus #0 MISC DPSC /MMC MISC Bus #1
Figure 2-80 Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card is mounted in PCI Slot No. 02 on CPU Board of CMP as shown in Figure 2-81.
PZ-PW92
IMG3
5.0 A
PALM
OUTPWR ON ALM INPWR
PCI bus
ISA bus
PZ-ME44
Figure 2-81 External Interface for PZ-M44 NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 157 Revision 1.0
PZ-ME44 PCI Memory
3.
Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors and lamps is shown in Figure 2-82.
COPY
SOFT
CONN
WE
Figure 2-82 Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card
4.
LAMP NAME COPY
COLOR Green OFF Green Copy mode Self mode
DESCRIPTION
Normally operating in copy mode (Valid when copy lamp lights) Remains OFF during ACT STBY memory copy Lights when Memory writing
SOFT OFF WE Green
5.
6.
External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.
7.
NDA-24296
PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface
PZ-PC19
Local Area Network Interface
1. General Function The PZ-PC19 (LANI) circuit card provides the interface for the 10-BASE-T and the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Bus. The microprocessor on the CPR sends/receives the Fusion Link Data and/or Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) data across the LAN interface (LANI).
To another Fusion Node
FCCH
DTI
DTI
FCCH
HUB
HUB
10-BASE-T
DSP
DSP
LANI
CPU
ISAGT
ISAGT
CPU
LANI
LANI CPR #0 CPR #1
LANI
PCI 10-BASE-T
HUB
MAT
IMX
NIC
Figure 2-83 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI)
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-PC19 (LANI) is located on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-84.
Mounting Module
LPM
PZ-GT13/GT16 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PW92 (PWR)
CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)
Figure 2-84 External Interface for PZ-PC19
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-85.
PCI BUS INTERFACE
10 BASE-T
EST0 EST1 EST2 EST3
Figure 2-85 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME EST0 EST1 EST2 EST3
COLOR Green Green Red Yellow Layer 1 link has established. Data packet sending/receiving. Layer 1 link failure.
DESCRIPTION
Data packet collision has occurred.
5.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface
FCH DTI
24DTR
HUB FCH CN2
10AL (10)FLT CA 10 BASE-T straight Cable
PZ-PC19(LANI)
HUB
TO IMX MAT 10 BASE-T straight Cable 10 BASE-T straight Cable
Figure 2-86 Cable Connections for PZ-PC19
7.
NDA-24296
PZ-PC22
1. General Function The PZ-PC22 (LANI) circuit card is a single port Ether card that builds up Fusion link or Ether LAN corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus slot in the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus. This card is mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in the IPX-UMG system.
To other Fusion Node
FCCH
DTI
DTI
FCCH
HUB 10BASE-T LP#0 LAN CPU LP#1 CPU
HUB 10BASE-T
LAN
CMP#0 LAN 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) HUB 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) SP#0 LAN CPU
CMP#1 CPU LAN
100BASE-TX (P-BUS) 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) SP#1 LAN
LAN 10BASE-T
CPU
CPU
LAN 10BASE-T
HUB
HUB
MAT NIC
Figure 2-87 Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-PC22 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-88.
CMP-CPR/LP-CPR
PZ-PW92
IMG3
5.0 A
PALM
OUTPWR ON ALM INPWR
PCI bus
ISA bus
PZ-PC22
Figure 2-88 Location of PZ-PC22
3.
Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-89.
LAN
100M TXRX LINK COL
Figure 2-89 Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME 100M TXRX LINK COL
COLOR Green Green Green Yellow
DESCRIPTION 100MHz mode Data packet sending/receiving Link has been established. Data packet collision has occurred.
5.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface
HUB
PZ-PC22 (LANI)
100 BASE-TX Straight Cable
Figure 2-90 External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI)
7.
NDA-24296
PZ-PC23
1. General Function The PZ-PC23 (LANI) circuit card is a multiple ports Ether card that builds up Fusion link or external Ether LAN corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. In the IPX-UMG system, one connector is used for Ethernet, and the other for Fusion link. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus slot within the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus or Fusion link. This card is mounted on the CPR of SP in the IPX-UMG system.
FCCH
DTI
DTI
FCCH
HUB 10BASE-T
LAN
CMP#1 CPU LAN
LAN 10BASE-T
CPU
CPU
LAN 10BASE-T
HUB
HUB
MAT NIC
Figure 2-91 Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-PC23 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus Slot No.0 and No.3 in the CPR of SP as shown in Figure 2-92.
SP-CPR
PZ-PW92
IMG3
5.0 A
PALM
OUTPWR ON ALM INPWR
PCI bus
ISA bus
PZ-PC23
Figure 2-92 Location for PZ-PC23
3.
Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-93.
Note
LAN0
100M0 LINK0 TXRX0 COL0
Note
LAN1
100M1 LINK1 TXRX1 COL1
Note:
Connect the Ether cable to LAN0 connector for Processor bus within the IPX-UMG system. When Fusion network is used, connect the Ether cable to LAN1 connector to establish Fusion link.
Figure 2-93 Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME 100M0/1 LINK0/1 TXRX0/1 COL0/1
COLOR Green Green Green Yellow
DESCRIPTION 100MHz mode Link has been established. Data packet sending/receiving Data packet collision has occurred.
5.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface
HUB(PH-CM103)
FCH DTI
24DTR
HUB FCH CN2
10AL (10)FLT CA 10 BASE-T Straight Cable
PZ-PC19(LANI) PZ-PC23(LANI)
HUB
Connected to the MAT 10 BASE-T Straight Cable 10 BASE-T Straight Cable
Figure 2-94 External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI)
7.
NDA-24296
CHAPTER 3
1. GENERAL
LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE
This chapter explains the following items about circuit cards. General Function Explains the general function and purpose for each control circuit card. Mounting Location/Condition Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) of each circuit card. If there are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face layout. Lamp Indications Names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed. Switch Settings Each circuit cards switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, setting and its meaning, standard setting, etc. External Interface If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector lead locations and the connecting routes are shown. In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet is provided at the end of the explanation of circuit cards.
NDA-24296
Chapter 3 Page 171 Revision 1.0
PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk
PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk
1. General Function The PA-CFTB (CFT) circuit card provides an interface for establishing a conference, which is made up of a maximum of eight parties. A maximum of seven Tie Lines can participate in a conference when the associated trunks can receive an answer signal and a release signal from the distant switching system. On the other hand, in the case of a C.O. line, one C.O. line can be connected even if the public switching system cannot send an answer signal and/or release signal. Note that a Tie Line and a C.O. Line cannot take part in a conference at the same time. The card adopts N-1 addition method for establishing a conference.
Note:
This circuit card is used for following features: Station-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [S-56]) Attendant-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-2]) Add On Conference-8 Party (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-121]) Group Call-Automatic Conference (20-party) (Refer to Wireless System Manual)
This diagram shows an example of a Preset conference involving Tie Line connections.
INT Answer/Release Signal TLT NETWORK TLT SW INT CH 7 6 5 4 3 LC Conferee 2 1 0 LC Conference Originator PCM INT VPROC PA-CFTB
Local I/O Bus CPU GT PCM INT: PCM Interface VPROC: Voice Processor Block
Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CFTB (CFT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.
NDA-24296
3.
OPE N-OPE SW2 SW1 SW0 BL7 MB
BL0
Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT)
4.
LAMP NAME
OPE N-OPE BL0 BL7
COLOR
Green Red Red Flash
STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy. BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is busy.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME
MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy
Circuit card make busy cancel Fixed in the system
SW0
12345678
ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SW 1
12345678
SWITCH NO.
1
SETTING
ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW2

12345678
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
Fixed in the system
ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 5 6 OFF OFF OFF
-law PCM encoder

A-law PCM encoder Conference connection is set up by PB tel. Conference connection is not set up by PB tel. When port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-388, SP457, SP-863, SP-990, SP-1114. When Port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-519, SP1141.
Not used Not used Not used
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SW2
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
CFTB Insertion Loss (PAD value) Setting
7 OFF
SW2-7
OFF OFF ON ON
SW2-8
OFF ON OFF ON
PAD [dB]
0 3 6 9
ON 8 OFF
6.
Switch Setting Sheet SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE

ON 12345678
MODULE
PIM
REMARKS
SW0
ON
12345678
SW1
ON
12345678
SW2
MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-CK14 Oscillator
PA-CK14
Oscillator
1. General Function The PLO block of the TSW card generates its base clock signals, and adjusts their phase with the source clock signals so the PLO can send the synchronized clock signals to the TSW. When the 1 IMG system is a clock-subordinate-office of the digital network, the base clock accuracy of the PLO/ PH-SW10 (5 ppm deviation) is sufficient. However, the more high-precision base clock signals are required at the clocksource-office, as this circuit card provides --- PA-CK14 (0.3 ppm deviation). When this circuit card is mounted, the 1 IMG system selects the PA-CK14 (OSC) clocks as the base clock of the PLO.
DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DSC 0
DSC 1
BWB
BWB
DSC1 SEL OSC PLO PLO DSC0 SEL OSC
SEL
FRONT CABLES
SEL
FRONT CABLES
TDSW
TDSW
MUX0
BWB
MUX1
MUX2
MUX3
MUX0
MUX1
MUX2
MUX3
BWB
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System
NDA-24296
PA-CK14 Oscillator
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CK14 (OSC) is located in Port Interface Module number zero (PIM 0). The card mounted in slot number 09 works as the primary OSC, 17 for the secondary OSC.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
OSC#0 OSC#1
PIM0
Note:
This card occupies two slots. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-4.
3.
CLKOUT 0 CLKOUT 1 MB
Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card
NDA-24296
PA-CK14 Oscillator
4.
LAMP NAME CLKOUT0 CLKOUT1
COLOR Green Green
STATE Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#0. Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#1.
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING ON OFF
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Make-busy of the circuit card.
Normal setting.
6.
External Interface Since the base clock signals are delivered through the printed-wiring on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of PIM 0, this circuit card does not require any external cabling.
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
NDA-24296
PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator
PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization with the network. With this circuit card, the 4 IMG system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-5, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.
DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DCS 0 DCS 1
MDF MDF 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB
SEL PLL OSC OSC
SEL PLL
PLO #0 BWB
PLO #1 BWB
TDSW00
TDSW01
TDSW02
TDSW03
TDSW10
TDSW11
TDSW12
TDSW13
Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System
NDA-24296
The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1. DCS 2. DIU0 3. DIU1 4. DIU2 5. DIU3 6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: 32.768 MHz CLK 8 KHz FH 5 msec n FH
NDA-24296
The MUSIC ROM located on this circuit card also contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for the external hold tone source.
FM MUSIC ROM
SEL
Figure 3-6 Music Source
NDA-24296
2.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO 0 PLO 1
3.
1 2 3 4
SW8F
ACT MB
MJ MN SYNC ICK PALM
SWAC SWAB
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW01
SW02
SW03
Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME ACT
COLOR Green Off
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office 32.768 MHz output clock failure
MJ
Red
8 KHz output FH failure 5 msec n output FH failure Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed Drifting failure Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) failure Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when either of the following has occurred: DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. Drifting failure Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Remains lit when power is abnormal.
MN
Red
Green SYNC
OFF
ICK PALM
Green Red
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy. 1
MEANING
Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Fixed to 1.
SW03
1-F
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING Clock subordinate office. Clock source office.
MEANING
Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has not occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card. A-law CODEC is used for the hold music. -law CODEC is used for the hold music. Not used.
4 OFF SW01 ON 5 OFF ON OFF 7 8 ON OFF OFF
NDA-24296
PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
MEANING DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. DIU 0 is not used. DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. DIU 1 is not used. DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. DIU 2 is not used. DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. DIU 3 is not used.
4 SW02 5
1.5 M clock for DIU 0 2 M clock for DIU 0 1.5 M clock for DIU 1 2 M clock for DIU 1 1.5 M clock for DIU 2 2 M clock for DIU 2 1.5 M clock for DIU 3 2 M clock for DIU 3 External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
SWAC
1 2
MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. Not used.

SW8F-1
SW8F-2
OFF
OFF OFF ON
600 8.2 47K
2 SW8F 3
ON OFF
SW8F-3
SW8F-4
OFF
OFF OFF ON
600 8.2 47K
ON OFF
NDA-24296
PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING
SWA0-2 SWA0-3
SETTING
MEANING
SWA0-1
MUSIC
OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF ON OFF
Note Note
3 SWAB 4 5 6 7 8
Note: ON OFF
Dont care.
Not used. Not used.
MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. ON OFF Not used. Not used.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.
Mounting Module
TSWM
34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION
REAR VIEW
TSWM
EXCLK1 (Slot No.23)
EXCLK0 (Slot No.21)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
FM 1 FM 0 SYN 1B SYN 0B DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B DCS B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
E E SYN 1A SYN 0A DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A DCS A
34PH EXCLK CA-A MDF
Installation Cable 34PH EXCLK CA-A
To Digital Interface and/or DCS
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PLO #0 PLO #1
TSWM
FRONT VIEW
Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)
NDA-24296
PBX
POUT A POUT B
MDF
CCT /DTI /PRT
CCT /DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
CCT /DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
CCT /DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
PLO #0
DCS
DCSA1 PLO #1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1
Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME MB
REMARKS
1 234 56 78
ON
SW01
1 234 56 78
ON
SW02
SW03
SWAC
12
ON
SW8F
1 23 4
ON
1 234 56 78
ON
SWAB
NDA-24296
PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator
PH-CK16-A
1. General Function This circuit card, used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization. With this circuit card, the system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-10, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.
DTI0 1 2 3
DCS0
DCS1 (MDF)
34PH EXCLK CA-A
34PH EXCLK CA-A
PLO #0
PLO #1
OSC
64K+8K (BWB)
OSC
SEL PLL Drv

BWB
CLK, FH, WFH ACT, ALM
SEL PLL
(BWB)
Drv
BWB
TSW 00
TSW 01
TSW 02
TSW 03
TSW 00
TSW 01
TSW 02
TSW 03
Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System
NDA-24296
DTI0 1 2 3
DCS0
(MDF)
DCS1
ISWM OSC
PLO 0 64K+8K (BWB)
PLO 1 OSC
SEL PLL Drv

32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB)
SEL PLL
(BWB)
Drv
HSW00
HSW01
HSW10
HSW11
TSW00
TSW03
64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable)
TSW10
TSW13
from LN/LMG DTI
from LN/LMG DTI
LN0/LMG0 (IMG0/IMG1)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03
PLO 0 (TSWM0)
PLO 1 (TSWM0)
PLO 0 (TSWM0)
PLO 1 (TSWM0)
LN3/LMG3 (IMG0/IMG1) /(IMG12/IMG13)

32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
TSW 10~13
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
CLK0 (TSWM1)
CLK1 (TSWM1)
CLK0 (TSWM1)
CLK1 (TSWM1)

32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
Figure 3-11 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. <For 4-IMG System>
Mounting Module
TSWM(IMG1)
PLO (#0) PLO (#1)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
<For IPX-U/IPX-UMG System>
Mounting Module
ISWM
PLO (#1) PLO (#0)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Mounting Module
TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)
PLO (#0) PLO (#1)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24296
3.
OPE MB
MJ MN SYNC ICK CKPKG ALM0 ALM1 PALM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
SW11
SW12
SW01
SW10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
SW02
SW03
Figure 3-12 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO)
NDA-24296
4.
Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office
MJ
Red
32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card) 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card) Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply route has failed Drifting failure Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) failure Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation. Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card. Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card. Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.
MN
Red
SYNC ICK CKPKG Note ALM0 Note ALM1 Note PALM Note:
Green Green Green Red Red Red
This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this card is mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
SW03
1-F
NDA-24296
The key setting of SW01 differs depending on the mounting location. [Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]
SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW01 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF 7 8 Note: ON OFF OFF Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 STANDARD SETTING Note 1 Clock subordinate office. Clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. This circuit card is not used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card. A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. -law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. Fixed to OFF (Not used). MEANING
When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source (DCS or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.
Note 1: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
NDA-24296
[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]

SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 SETTING ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW01 4 OFF ON 5 OFF STANDARD SETTING MEANING Clock subordinate office. (Fixed) Clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.) Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.) Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.) Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.) 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has not occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. (Fixed to ON) This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card. A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.
ON OFF
7 8
ON OFF OFF
-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. Fixed OFF (Not used).
NDA-24296
PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
4 SW02 Note 2 5
1.5 M clock for DIU 0. 2 M clock for DIU 0. 1.5 M clock for DIU 1. 2 M clock for DIU 1. 1.5 M clock for DIU 2. 2 M clock for DIU 2. 1.5 M clock for DIU 3. 2 M clock for DIU 3. External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
1 SW10 2 Note 3
MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. CLK card is not used. CLK card is used.
Note 2: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U system, the DCS clock from the ISWM is used. The DTI
clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.
Note 3: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to ON (=CLK card is not used).
If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG, set to OFF if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used. set to ON if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW11-1
SW11-2
2 SW11 3
OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF ON
600 8.2 47K
SW11-3
SW11-4
OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF ON
600 8.2 47K
1
SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC
OFF
OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
ON Dont Care
3 SW12 ON 4 OFF 5 6 7 ON 8 OFF
Dont Care
Not used. Not used.
MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. Not used. Not used.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface PLO leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.
PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.
Front View
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK0 EXCLK1
TSWM
PLO
PLO
TSW
LT cable connectors Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.
Backplane
EXCLK1
EXCLK0
TSWM
Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)
NDA-24296
EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) DIU3xx (low).
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location
TSWM
EXCLK1
EXCLK0
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A
REAR VIEW
MDF 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
Installation Cable
PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1. PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
Front View
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23
EXCLK1 EXCLK0
ISWM
PLO
PLO
NDA-24296
LT cable connectors Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.
Backplane
EXCLK1 EXCLK0
ISWM
Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)
EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) DIU3xx (low).
Rear View
ISWM
EXCLK1 (Slot No.13)
EXCLK0 (Slot No.09)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
MDF
Installation Cable
NDA-24296
Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-15 shows an example of a system with the PLO cards in dual configuration.
maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG) ISW/CMG
MDF
PCM Cable(IP) External High-Stability Oscillator #1 CLK
PLO#1 EXCLK1 ISWM PLO#0 EXCLK0
LT Connector Cable
DCSA DCSB
EXCLK1 LT Connector Cable DCSB DCSA PCM Cable(IP) EXCLK0
BASEU
External High-Stability Oscillator #0 CLK
Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator
NDA-24296
Figure 3-16 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)
LN/LMG
Digital Interface
LT Connector
MDF
Installation Cable RA RB TA TB POUTA POUTB CLK DIU0A0 EXCLK0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 PLO#1 EXCLK1 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 Installation Cable DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 PCM Cable (2P) to other node
ISW/CMG
maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG) Installation Cable
PCM Carrier Equipment DSU
PLO#0
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1: PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
Figure 3-16 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface
NDA-24296
ISWM CLK10 (Slot No.12) CLK00 (Slot No.08)
DCS Connection
ISW-LN PLO CA-A EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM0 PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM1
PLO-CLK CA-A
DIU Connection Note
MDF
Installation Cable
To Digital Interface
PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
LEAD NAME FM1 FM0
DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B
PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
LEAD NAME E E
DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A
Note:
For the DUI connection route diagram, see Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-17 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)
NDA-24296
Figure 3-18 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMG system.)
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)
IMG
LT Connector Digital Interface Installation Cable
MDF
RA RB TA TB POUT A POUT B
PCM Cable (2P)
to other node
CLK
PLO#0 EXCLK0
Installation Cable
PLO#1 EXCLK1
DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0

Installation Cable
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1: PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
Figure 3-18 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface
NDA-24296
ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Pin Assignment PIN LEAD No. NAME 26 FM1 27 FM0 28 29 30 31 32 33 PIN LEAD No. NAME 1 E 2 E 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ISW-LN PLO CA-A/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and Installation Cable(25 P) MDF
Note
MUSIC SOURCE
Multiple connections between systems 0 and 1 are required on the MDF.
Note: FM1 is not used at this time.

Figure 3-19 Connection of External Music-On-Hold
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME MB
SW01
1 234 5 67 8
ON
SW02
1 234 5 67 8
ON
SW03
12
ON
SW10
ON
SW11
1 234
SW12
1 234 5 67 8
ON
NDA-24296
PH-CK17
1. General Function This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization with the network. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the 4 IMG system can be a clock source office for the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-20, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.
DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DCS 0 DCS 1
MDF MDF 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB
SEL PLL OSC OSC
SEL PLL
PLO #0 BWB
PLO #1 BWB
TDSW00
TDSW01
TDSW02
TDSW03
TDSW10
TDSW11
TDSW12
TDSW13
Figure 3-20 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System
NDA-24296
The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1. DCS 2. DIU0 3. DIU1 4. DIU2 5. DIU3 6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: 32.768 MHz CLK 8 KHz FH 5 msec n FH
NDA-24296
The MUSIC ROM also located on this circuit card contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for the external hold tone source.
FM MUSIC ROM
SEL
Figure 3-21 Music Source
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Module
TSWM
PLO 0 PLO 1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSWM
3.
ACT MB
MJ MN SYNC ICK PALM
SW06 SW05 SW04

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
1 2
SW01
SW02
SW03
Figure 3-22 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME ACT
COLOR Green Off
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office. 32.768 MHz output clock failure.
MJ
Red
8 KHz output FH failure. 5 msec n output FH failure. Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card). Internal OSC (0.3 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office. Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes failed. Drifting failure. Internal OSC (0.3 ppm deviation) failure. Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when either of the following has occurred. DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. Drifting failure. Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Remains lit when power is abnormal.
MN
Red
Green SYNC
OFF
ICK PALM
Green Red
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
SW03
1-F
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING Clock subordinate office. Clock source office.
MEANING
Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. A-law CODEC is used for the hold music. -law CODEC is used for the hold music. Not used.
4 OFF SW01 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF 7 8 ON OFF OFF
NDA-24296
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
4 SW02 5
1.5 M clock for DIU 0 2 M clock for DIU 0 1.5 M clock for DIU 1 2 M clock for DIU 1 1.5 M clock for DIU 2 2 M clock for DIU 2 1.5 M clock for DIU 3 2 M clock for DIU 3 External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
SW05
1 2 1
MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. Not used.
SW8F-1
SW8F-2
2 SW06 3
OFF ON OFF
SW8F-3
OFF OFF ON
SW8F-4
600 8.2 47K

OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF ON
600 8.2 47K
NDA-24296
SETTING
MEANING
SWA0-1
SWA0-2
SWA0-3
MUSIC
OFF ON Note Note
OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF ON OFF
3 Note: SW04 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF Not used. Not used. MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. ON OFF
Dont care.
Not used. Not used.
NDA-24296
5.
External Interface When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.
Mounting Module
TSWM
34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION
REAR VIEW
TSWM
EXCLK1 (Slot No.23)
EXCLK0 (Slot No.21)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
FM 1 FM 0 SYN 1B SYN 0B DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B DCS B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
E E SYN 1A SYN 0A DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A DCS A
34PH EXCLK CA-A MDF
Installation Cable 34PH EXCLK CA-A
Slot No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PLO #0 PLO #1
TSWM
FRONT VIEW
Figure 3-23 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)
NDA-24296
PBX
POUT A POUT B
MDF
CCT /DTI /PRT
CCT /DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
CCT /DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
CCT /DTI /PRT
POUT A POUT B
PLO #0
DCS
DCSA1 PLO #1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1
Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).
NDA-24296
6.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME MB
REMARKS
123 4 56 78
ON
SW01
12 34 567 8
ON
SW02
SW03
SW05
12
ON
SW06
1 234
ON
1 23 4 56 78
ON
SW04
NDA-24296
PH-CK17-A
1. General Function This circuit card used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization between networks. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the system containing this circuit card can be a clock source office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-25, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.
DTI0 1 2 3
DCS0
DCS1 (MDF)
34PH EXCLK CA-A
34PH EXCLK CA-A
PLO #0
PLO #1
OSC
64K+8K (BWB)
OSC
SEL PLL Drv

BWB
SEL PLL
(BWB)
Drv
BWB
TSW 00
TSW 01
TSW 02
TSW 03
TSW 00
TSW 01
TSW 02
TSW 03
Figure 3-25 Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System
NDA-24296
DTI0 1 2 3
DCS0
(MDF)
DCS1
ISWM OSC
PLO 0 64K+8K (BWB)
PLO 1 OSC
SEL PLL Drv

SEL PLL Drv

(BWB)
HSW00
HSW01
HSW10
HSW11
TSW00
TSW03
TSW10
TSW13
from LN/LMG DTI
from LN/LMG DTI
PLO 0 (TSWM0)
PLO 1 (TSWM0)
PLO 0 (TSWM0)
PLO 1 (TSWM0)

32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
TSW 10~13
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
CLK0 (TSWM1)
CLK1 (TSWM1)
CLK0 (TSWM1)
CLK1 (TSWM1)

32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
Figure 3-26 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. <For 4-IMG System>
Mounting Module
TSWM(IMG1)
PLO (#0) PLO (#1)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Mounting Module
TSWM0(IMG1)
<For IPX-U/IPX-UMG System>
Mounting Module
ISWM
PLO (#1) PLO (#0)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Mounting Module
TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)
PLO (#0) PLO (#1)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-27:
OPE MB
MJ MN SYNC ICK CKPKG ALM0 ALM1 PALM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
SW11
SW12
SW01
SW10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
SW02
SW03
Figure 3-27 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office
MJ
Red
32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card) 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card) Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:
MN
Red
One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed Drifting failure Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) failure
SYNC ICK CKPKG Note ALM0 Note ALM1 Note PALM Note:
Green Green Green Red Red Red
Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation. Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card. Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card. Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.
This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this card is mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
SW03
1-F
NDA-24296
The key setting of SW01 differs depending on the mounting location. [Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]
SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW01 OFF ON 5 OFF Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 STANDARD SETTING Note 2 Clock subordinate office. Clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. Note 2 This circuit card is not used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. -law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. Fixed to OFF (Not used). MEANING
ON 6 OFF 7 8 ON OFF OFF
Note 1: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source (DCS
or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.

Note 2: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.
NDA-24296
[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]

SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 SETTING ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW01 OFF ON 5 OFF STANDARD SETTING MEANING Clock subordinate office. (Fixed) Clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.) Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.) Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.) Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.) 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).
8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. (Fixed to ON ) This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. A-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.
ON 6 OFF 7 8 ON OFF OFF
-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold. Fixed OFF (Not used).
NDA-24296
PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
4 SW02 Note 1 5
1.5 M clock for DIU 0. 2 M clock for DIU 0. 1.5 M clock for DIU 1. 2 M clock for DIU 1. 1.5 M clock for DIU 2. 2 M clock for DIU 2. 1.5 M clock for DIU 3. 2 M clock for DIU 3. External hold tone source is used via FM lead.
1 SW10 2 Note 2
MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. CLK card is not used. CLK card is used.
Note 1: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, DCS clock from the ISWM is used.
The DTI clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.
Note 2: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to ON (=CLK card is not used).
If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG, set to OFF if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used. set to ON if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
SW11-2
MEANING
SW11-1
2 SW11 3
OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF ON
600 8.2 47K

SW11-3
SW11-4
4 1 2 3
OFF ON OFF
SW12-1
OFF OFF ON
SW12-2 SW12-3
600 8.2 47K

MUSIC
OFF ON Dont Care Dont Care
OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
ON 4 SW12 5 6 7 ON 8 OFF OFF
Not used. Not used.
MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. Not used. Not used.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1
PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.
Front View
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK0 EXCLK1
TSWM
PLO
PLO
TSW
LT cable connectors Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.
Backplane
EXCLK1
EXCLK0
TSWM
NDA-24296
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location
TSWM
EXCLK1
EXCLK0
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
REAR VIEW
MDF 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A
Installation Cable
Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2)
PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1. PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
Front View
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK1 EXCLK0
ISWM
PLO
PLO
NDA-24296
LT cable connectors Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.
Backplane
EXCLK1 EXCLK0
ISWM
Rear View
ISWM
EXCLK1 (Slot No.13)
EXCLK0 (Slot No.09)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
MDF
Installation Cable
NDA-24296
Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-30 shows an example of a system that has the PLO cards in dual configuration.
maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG) ISW/CMG
MDF
PCM Cable(IP) External High-Stability Oscillator #1 CLK
PLO#1 EXCLK1 ISWM PLO#0 EXCLK0
LT Connector Cable
DCSA DCSB
EXCLK1 LT Connector Cable DCSB DCSA PCM Cable(IP) EXCLK0
BASEU
External High-Stability Oscillator #0 CLK
Figure 3-30 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator
NDA-24296
Figure 3-31 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.
LN/LMG
Digital Interface
LT Connector
MDF
Installation Cable RA RB TA TB POUTA POUTB PCM Cable (2P) to other node
ISW/CMG
maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG) Installation Cable

CLK
PLO#0 EXCLK0
DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 PLO#1 EXCLK1 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 Installation Cable DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1: PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface
NDA-24296
DCS Connection
PLO-CLK CA-A
DIU Connection Note
MDF
Installation Cable
To Digital Interface
PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
LEAD NAME FM1 FM0
DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B
PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LEAD NAME E E
DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A
Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page.
Figure 3-32 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)
NDA-24296
Figure 3-33 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMG system.)
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)
IMG
LT Connector Digital Interface Installation Cable
MDF
RA RB TA TB POUT A POUT B
PCM Cable (2P)
to other node
CLK
PLO#0 EXCLK0
Installation Cable
PLO#1 EXCLK1

Installation Cable
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1: PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.
Figure 3-33 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface
NDA-24296
ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Pin Assignment PIN LEAD No. NAME 26 FM1 27 FM0 28 29 30 31 32 33 PIN LEAD No. NAME 1 E 2 E 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ISW-LN PLO CA-A / 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and Installation Cable(25P) MDF
Note
MUSIC SOURCE
Multiple connections between the systems 0 and 1 are required on the MDF.
Note: FM1 is not used at this time.

Figure 3-34 Connection of External Music-On-Hold
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME MB
SW01
12 34 56 78
ON
SW02
12 34 56 78
ON
SW03
12
ON
SW10
ON
SW11
12 34
SW12
1 234 5 67 8
ON
NDA-24296
PH-CK18 Clock
PH-CK18
Clock
1. General Function This circuit card is used for the Local Node (LN) of the IPX-U system or used for the Local Module Group (LMG) of the IPX-UMG system. The main function of this circuit card is to supply basic clock signals to the system. This card receives clock signals from the Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) located in TSWM0 of IMG1/5/9/13, distributing the following signals to the Time Division Switch (TSW) located in TSWM1 of IMG2/6/10/14. 32.768 MHz CLK 8 KHz FH 5 msec n FH (for Wireless System)
DTI0 1 2 3 DCS0 (MDF) DCS1
ISW OSC
PLO 0 64K+8K (BWB)
PLO 1 OSC
SEL PLL Drv

CL K, FH, W F H A C T, A LM
SEL PLL Drv

(BWB)
HSW00
HSW01
HSW10
HSW11
TSW00
TSW03
TSW10
TSW13
from LN/LMG DTI
from LN/LMG DTI
PLO 0 (TSWM0)
PLO 1 (TSWM0)
PLO 0 (TSWM0)
PLO 1 (TSWM0)

32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
TSW 10~13
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
CLK0 (TSWM1)
CLK1 (TSWM1)
CLK0 (TSWM1)
CLK1 (TSWM1)

32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
TSW 00~03
TSW 10~13
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
MUX (System0)
MUX (System1)
LC/TRK
LC/TRK
Figure 3-35 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 239 Revision 1.0
PH-CK18 Clock
2.
Mounting Location/Condition Mounting locations for this circuit card are shown below.
Mounting Module
TSWM1(IMG2/6/10/14)
CLK (#1) CLK (#0)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of each lamp and switch on this circuit card is shown in the figure below:
OPE MB
ALM0 ALM1 PALM
Figure 3-36 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK)
NDA-24296
PH-CK18 Clock
4.
Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown below:
LAMP OPE ALM 0 ALM 1 PALM COLOR Green Red Red Red MEANING Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state. Lights when clock signal failure has occurred. Lights when Frame Head signal failure has occurred. Lights when the On Board Power Supply failure has occurred.
5.
Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown below.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING ON OFF
MEANING
NDA-24296
PH-CK18 Clock
6.
External Interface
DCS Connection
PLO-CLK CA-A
DIU Connection Note
MDF
Installation Cable
PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
LEAD NAME
DIU DIU DIU DIU
3B 2B 1B 0B
PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LEAD NAME
DIU DIU DIU DIU
3A 2A 1A 0A
Figure 3-37 LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1)
NDA-24296
PH-CK18 Clock
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME MB
REMARKS
NDA-24296
PA-8COTBJ Central Office Trunk
PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk
1. General Function The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 8C.O. lines and the system. And this card also provides the caller ID service. Depending upon keys setting of this card, the first circuit on this card can be used as an interface for Paging Equipment. In this instance, the second circuit is also used for the purpose of activating the Paging Equipment. Example of the Paging Equipment and Caller ID service are illustrated below. In addition, the appropriate value of Terminal Impedance and Balancing Network (BNW) can be selected by key setting. This diagram shows an example where this card is used as both a PGT and COTs.
SW
PA-8COTBJ MDF Speech Line Control Line G MODEM To Battery PAGING EQUIPMENT
INT
INT
PGT
"555-1234"
circuit 1 circuit 2
PGT Terminal
ATI Attendant Console
COT COT
circuit 7 circuit 8 "555-1234" PUBLIC NETWORK
MODEM "555-1234"
Local I/O Bus CPU GT

Terminal
Figure 3-38 Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05
PIM
06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-39.
OPE SW00 (MB) BL4~7
BL0~3
SW01 (MB0-7)
SW02
SW03
SW04
SW05
Figure 3-39 Face Layout of PA-8COTBJ (8COT)
4.
8COT Lamp Indication Reference
LAMP NAME OPE BL0 BL7
COLOR Green Green OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding circuit is in make busy state. BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH SW00 (MB)
SETTING UP DOWN ON OFF
MEANING Circuit card make busy
Circuit card make busy cancel Request for make-busy of the trunk circuit corresponding to MB switch.
SW01 (MB0-7)
Request for cancelling the make-busy of the trunk circuit corresponding to MB switch. Terminal Impedance and B.N.W.setting
SW0 (SW10) 1 2 3 4 MEANINGS Terminal B.N.W. Impedance
SW02
1-4
OFF OFF OFF OFF EIA/TIA 464-A 600 +2.16 OFF ON ON OFF CCITT Q.517 900 +2.16 ON ON ON OFF 900 Other Combinations Inhibited
1 2 SW03 3 4 1 2 SW04 3 4 1 2 SW05 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Fixed to OFF (Not Used) Fixed to OFF (Not Used) Fixed to OFF (Not Used) Fixed to OFF (Not Used) Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Paging Trunk is available (When this switch is set to ON, CH0 and CH1 cannot be used as CO trunks.) Paging Trunk is not available.
Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT Connector Slot No.
LT2
LT4
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-40 LT Connector Leads Accommodation
NDA-24296
Cable Connections for a C.O. Line
PBX
Installation Cable A0 B0 LT Connector
MDF A B PUBLIC NETWORK
COT
Cable Connections for Paging Equipment PBX Installation Cable A0 B0 LT Connector B1 A1 -48V FUSE G -48V G G Control Line MDF A B PAGING EQUIPMENT Speech Path
COT
Note:
As illustrated above, two circuits (#0, #1) are required for connecting paging equipment.
Figure 3-41 Connecting Route Diagram Table 3-1 Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance Balancing Network
350 1k 600 0.21F 600+2.16 900 2.16F
Terminal Impedance
EIA/TIA 464-A
900
900 100 0.05F 2.16F
CCITT Q. 517 AT&T Echo Test Network
800
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)
OFF
No.8 No.7 No.6 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1
MODULE
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS UP: Circuit card make busy. DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel.
SW01 (MB0-7)
Make Busy switches associated with No. 0 through No. 7 Circuits. ON: Make busy on each circuit basis. OFF: Make busy cancel on each circuit basis.
ON
1 234
ON
SW02 PIM
SW03
1 234
ON
SW04
1 234
ON
SW05
1 234
ON
NDA-24296
PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk
PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk
1. General Function This circuit card is accommodated in the PIM and supports the following interface. (a) Interface with 16 C.O. lines (b) Interface with 14 C.O. lines and 1 Paging Equipment line.
TSW COT
C.O. Line LC
Paging Equipment
Figure 3-42 Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
OPE SW00(MB) BL15
BL0
SW0 SW1
SW02(MB8-15)
SW01(MB0-7)
Figure 3-43 Face Layout of PA-16 COTBE (16COT)
4.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
STATE
OPE BL0
Green Green Flash OFF
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding circuit is in make busy state. BL- lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
BL15
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel No. 0 Circuit make busy No. 0 Circuit make busy cancel No. 1 Circuit make busy No. 1 Circuit make busy cancel No. 2 Circuit make busy No. 2 Circuit make busy cancel No. 3 Circuit make busy No. 3 Circuit make busy cancel No. 4 Circuit make busy No. 4 Circuit make busy cancel No. 5 Circuit make busy No. 5 Circuit make busy cancel No. 6 Circuit make busy No. 6 Circuit make busy cancel No. 7 Circuit make busy No. 7 Circuit make busy cancel
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
3 SW01 (MB0 ~ 7) 4
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 0
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
STANDARD SETTING No. 8 Circuit make busy
MEANING
No. 8 Circuit make busy cancel No. 9 Circuit make busy No. 9 Circuit make busy cancel No. 10 Circuit make busy No. 10 Circuit make busy cancel No. 11 Circuit make busy No. 11 Circuit make busy cancel No. 12 Circuit make busy No. 12 Circuit make busy cancel No. 13 Circuit make busy No. 13 Circuit make busy cancel No. 14 Circuit make busy No. 14 Circuit make busy cancel No. 15 Circuit make busy No. 15 Circuit make busy cancel
3 SW02 (MB8 ~ 15) 4
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING Terminal Impedance

SW0 (SW10)
MEANING
MEANING
1-4
1 OFF OFF
2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF Other Combinations
Terminal impedance 600 + 2.16 F 900 + 2.16 F Not used
Wink Signal Detection Time.

SW0 (SW10) Detection Time 5 6
SW0 (SW10)
5, 6
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON
56 ms 96 ms 136 ms 176 ms
Answer Signal Detection Time.

SW0 (SW10) Detection Time 7 8
7, 8
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON
56 ms 96 ms 136 ms 176 ms
Note:
Switch No.5-8 is only available when SP-3331 is used for E911 service. If SP-3003 is used, these switches are fixed to off.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING Fixed
MEANING
Fixed (Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if ringing signal does not arrive longer than three seconds.)
3 OFF ON SW1 (SW11) 4 OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Fixed (Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if ringing signal does not arrive longer than six seconds.) Availability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a Paging trunk (No. 1 Circuit cannot be used as a C.O. trunk) Availability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a C.O. trunk (No. 1 Circuit can be used as a C.O. trunk)
Fixed Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
NDA-24296
PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk PAD Setting ARTD 7 2 3 4 APAD 15 2 3 4 TRANSMIT (D-A) PAD 0dB 3dB 6dB 0dB RECEIVE (A-D) PAD 0dB 3dB 6dB -5dB (Gain) REMARKS
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-44.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Connection with C.O. Line
MDF NEAX2400 IPX A C.O. Line B0 B
COT
A0
Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)
Connection with Paging Equipment
MDF NEAX2400 IPX A0 B0 A
Speech Signal Leads
COT
Paging Equipment B
B1 (MR) B0
G G -48V
G -48V
FUSE
Distibution Board
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS UP : Circuit card make busy DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel
MODULE
SW00 (MB)
ON
OFF
SW01 (MB0-7)
Make Busy Switches associated with No. 0 through No. 7 Circuits. ON : Make busy on each circuit basis. OFF: Make busy cancel on each circuit basis.
ON
OFF
PIM SW02 (MB8-15)

Make Busy Switches associated with No. 8 through No. 15 Circuits. ON : Make busy on each circuit basis. OFF: Make busy cancel on each circuit basis.
ON
SW0
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
SW1
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
NDA-24296
PA-CS02-C Attendant Interface
PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface
1. General Function This circuit card is an attendant console (ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface function for accommodating ATTCON (maximum two sets of ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (ATTCON Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc. The PA-CS02-C card is exclusively for a system which adopts -law as its encoding law.
: Control Line : Speech Path 12M PCM Highway IO Local Bus : Input Output Local Bus PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus
SW
2M PCM Highway
12
INT I/O Local Bus PM Bus 2 ATTENDANT CONSOLE (2)
CPU
GATE
ATI
Figure 3-46 Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS02-C (ATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ATI
ATI
NDA-24296
3.
SW3 SW2 OPE N-OPE SW6 SW7 MB
BLS1 BLS0 BLA1 BLA0
SW8
3 2 1 0
Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-CS02-C (2ATI)
NDA-24296
4.
Table 3-2 ATI Card Lamp Indication
LAMP
OPE N-OPE
COLOR
Green Red Red
STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use. Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in make-busy state or when select signals are being transmitted. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.
BLS0 BLS1 BLA0 BLA1
Flash Red Flash
5.
Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NO.
SWITCH
SETTING
UP
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
MB
DOWN
1 SW2-1/ SW3-1 2
SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE SW2-2/ SW2-3/ SW2-4/ RESISTANCE SW3-2 SW3-3 SW3-4 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 200 390 590 820 1020 1210 1410
SW2 (TAS1) SW3 (TAS0)

3
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH
SWITCH NO.
1
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM
2 3 4
SW6-1/ SW7-1
SW6-2/ SW7-2
SW6-3/ SW7-3
SW6-4/ SW7-4
TAS (A WIRE)
TAS (B WIRE)
ON OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF ON ON
-48V CR G LOOP
G G G LOOP
ON
0
No. 0 circuit make-busy request
OFF ON SW8
1
Normal setting No. 1 circuit make-busy request Normal setting Not used Not used
OFF
2 3
OFF OFF
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-48.
Mounting Module
PIM
< LT Connector on the ATT TERM> 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 TAS 0B 43 44 TAS 1B 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
[ATT TERM (PZ-M366)]
LT
To LT5/LT11
RLT
ATT1
ATT0 SW0
ON ON 1 2 3 4
SW1
1 2 3 4
IC
TAS 0A TAS 1A
LT0 Slot No.
LT1
LT2
LT3
LT4
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
ATI
ATI
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
7.
Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH SHAPE

1234 SW2
MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

PIM
REMARKS
1234 SW3
1234 SW6 12, 23 1234 SW7
OFF No.3 No.2 No.1 No.0 ON
SW8
NDA-24296
PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface
PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface
1. General Function This circuit card is the Hotel Attendant Console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card that supports the interface function for the Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc.
: Control Line : Speech Path I/O Local Bus : Input/Output Local Bus PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus TDSW 2M PCM Highway
MUX PM Bus ATTENDANT CONSOLE (2)
CPU
GT
HMATI
Figure 3-49 Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS08 (HMATI) card can be mounted in the shaded slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 HMATI HMATI
NDA-24296
3.
SW03 SW02
SW08 SW07 OPE N-OPE SW04 MB
SW11 FU1 (Note )
FU0 (Note ) BLS1 BLS0 BLA1 BLA0 SW09 3 2 1 0
SW12
Note:
When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1. 2 3 <Extraction> 1 MB key ON Remove the FU0 and FU1. Extract this card. <Insertion> 1 Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. 2 Plug in the FU0 and FU1. 3 MB key OFF
Figure 3-50 Face Layout of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP OPE N-OPE BLS0 BLS1 COLOR Green Red Red Blink Note: BLA0 BLA1 Red Blink The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH
SETTING UP
MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
MB
DOWN 1
SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM
2 3 4 1 ON OFF ON OFF
SWITCH
TAS (A WIRE)
TAS (B WIRE)
1 2 3 4
-48V CR G LOOP
G G G LOOP
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed
SW04
2 3 4 1
SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE SW7-1/ SW8-1 SW7-2/ SW8-2 SW7-3/ SW8-3 SW7-4/ SW8-4 RESISTANCE
2 SW07 (TAS0) SW08 (TAS1) 3

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
0 200 390 590 820 1020 1210 1410
NDA-24296
PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING No. 0 System is in Make-busy request. Normal setting No. 1 System is in Make-busy request. Normal setting Not used Not used Fixed (all ON)
SWITCH
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
MEANING
Fixed
2 SW11 3
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
2 SW12 3
SW9
1 2 3
Note:
When the PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX 114, b7 = I.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface The location for the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-51.
Mounting Module
PIM PIM
LT5, 11 Connector (LT Connector on the ATT TERM) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 TAS 0B0 43 TAS 1B0 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 TAS 0A0 18 TAS 1A0 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
LT5 LT0 Slot No. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10
LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
HMATI
HMATI
PIM
Figure 3-51 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS UP: Circuit card Make-busy. DOWN: Circuit card Make-busy cancel.
MB
1 2 3 4
SW02
1 2 3 4
SW03
ON
SW04
1 2 3 4
ON
SW07
1 2 3 4
ON
SW08
1 2 3 4
OFF No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0 ON (Piano Switch) ON
SW09
SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used
SW11
1 2 3 4
ON
SW12
1 2 3 4
NDA-24296
PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface
PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface
1. General Function This circuit card is Hotel attendant console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface function for accommodating Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc.
: Control Line : Speech Path I/O Local Bus : Input/Output Local Bus PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus TSW 2M PCM Highway
MUX I/O Local Bus PM Bus ATTENDANT CONSOLE (2)
CPU
GT
HMATI
Figure 3-52 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS08-B (HMATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 HMATI 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 HMATI
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.
SW03 SW02
SW08 SW07 OPE N-OPE SW04 MB
SW11 FU1 (Note)
FU0 (Note) BLS1 BLS0 BLA1 BLA0 SW09 3 2 1 0
SW12
Note:
When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1. 1 <Extraction> MB key ON 2 Remove the FU0 and FU1. 3 Extract this card. 1 Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. 2 Plug in the FU0 and FU1. <Insertion> 3 MB key OFF
Figure 3-53 Face Layout of PA-CS08-B (HMATI)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP OPE N-OPE BLS0 BLS1 COLOR Green Red Red Blink Note: BLA0 BLA1 Red Blink The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH MB
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
Circuit card make busy Circuit card make busy cancel

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM SWITCH TAS (A WIRE) TAS (B WIRE)
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
-48V CR G LOOP
G G G LOOP
SW04
1 2 3 4
ON OFF ON OFF
1
SW7-1/ SW8-1
SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE SW7-2/ SW8-2 SW7-3/ SW8-3 SW7-4/ SW8-4 RESISTANCE
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
0 200 390 590 820 1020 1210 1410
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW11
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
Fixed
OFF ON
Fixed
OFF ON
Fixed
4 SW12 1
OFF ON OFF
Fixed
ON OFF
Fixed (all ON)
ON OFF
4 SW9 0
ON OFF ON OFF ON
No. 0 System is in make-busy request.
Normal setting No. 1 System is in make-busy request. Normal setting Not used Not used
1 2 3 Note:
OFF OFF OFF
When PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~ 4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX 114, b7 = I.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-54.
Mounting Module
PIM
LT5, 11 Connector (LT Connector on the ATT TERM) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 TAS 0B0 43 TAS 1B0 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 TAS 0A0 18 TAS 1A0 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
HMATI
HMATI
PIM
NDA-24296
7.
SWITCH
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS UP: Circuit card make busy DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel
MB
1 2 3 4
SW02
1 2 3 4
SW03
ON
SW04
1 2 3 4
ON
SW07
1 2 3 4
ON
SW08
1 2 3 4
OFF No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0 ON (Piano Switch) ON
SW09
SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used
SW11
1 2 3 4
ON
SW12
1 2 3 4
NDA-24296
PA-CS33 Attendant Interface
PA-CS33
Attendant Interface
1. General Function This circuit card is a Desk Console interface which supports the interface function for accommodating two sets of Desk Consoles, PB/DP sender function and Trunk Answer from any Station (TAS) function.
MUX PCM HW PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW PM BUS
MUX
PCM HW PM BUS
PCM HW TSW/INT/PLO CPR GT MUX LC/TRK ATI PM BUS
DESK CONSOLE
Figure 3-55 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS33 (ATI) can be mounted in either Slot 12 or 23 of the PIM.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ATI ATI
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 3-56.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPE SW00 PALM BLA1 BLA0 BLS1 BLS0
SW17 SW11 SW10 SW13 SW12 SW15 SW14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW01
SW16
Figure 3-56 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green OFF Red OFF Red
STATE Remains lit while circuit card is operating normally. Off when circuit card is not operating. Lights when the power feeding circuit failure has occurred. Off when the power feeding circuit operates normally. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy (At the same time, turns off PA lamp on the Desk Console). Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. Off when the corresponding circuit is in idle (At the same time, turns onPA lamp on the Desk console). Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use. Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in Make-busy state or when select signals are being transmitted. Off when the corresponding sender circuit is in idle.
PALM
BLA0 BLA1
Flash (60 IPM) OFF Red
BLS0 BLS1
Flash (60 IPM) OFF
5.
Switch Setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME SW00
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING Circuit card is Make-busy.
MEANING
Circuit card is cancel for Make-busy.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO 0
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Make-busy cancel for #0 Desk Console. Make-busy request for #0 Desk Console.
Make-busy cancel for #1 Desk Console. Make-busy request for #1 Desk Console.
SW01
1 OFF 2 3 OFF OFF Not used. Not used.
NDA-24296
PA-CS33 Attendant Interface SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO STANDARD SETTING
SETTING
MEANING
SW10 and SW13 designate the current limit resistance for TAS#0 and TAS#1 respectively. 1
SW10-3/ SW13-3 SW10-2/ SW13-2 SW10-1/ SW13-1 STANDARD SETTING RESISTANCE
ON ON
0 220 398 618 800 1020 1198
SW10 (TAS#0) SW13 (TAS#1)
ON
ON OFF OFF OFF
OFF
1418
This switch designates the TAS signaling system in conjunction with SW 11/12 and SW14/15.
SW11/12 and SW14/15 designate the TAS#0 and TAS#1 signaling system (in conjunction with SW10-4 (TAS#0)/SW13-4 (TAS#1). SW11/ SW12 (TAS#0) SW14/ SW15 (TAS#1)
SIGNAL WHEN SEIZED SW12/ SW15 SW11/ SW14 SW10-4/ SW13-4 STANDARD SETTING TAS 0A/ TAS 1A TAS 0B/ TAS 1B
ON OFF OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
ON ON OFF ON
CR -48V
G G LOOP G
LOOP G
NDA-24296
PA-CS33 Attendant Interface SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO STANDARD SETTING
SETTING
MEANING
For Business system, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 to OFF. When the system has Hotel application, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 according to system data as shown below.
Desk Console Key pattern to be used SYS 1 INDEX 160 SW16-1 SW16-7 Bit 1 Bit 0
1
Hotel type ON
ON OFF ON OFF
1 0
1 1 1 0
Business type
OFF
2 SW16 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
ON OFF
Desk Console Expanded LCD Display available. Desk Console Expanded LCD Display not available.
SW16-3/4/5 designates the nation code as shown below.

SW16-5 SW16-4 SW16-3 COUNTRY
ON ON
ON OFF Other combinations
OFF ON
NORTH AMERICA AUSTRALIA Not used
ON OFF Refer to SW16-1. OFF ON OFF ON
A-law PCM coding. -law PCM coding. Not used (Fixed to OFF). Denial of PCM receiving while transmitting PB signals. PCM receives irrespective of PB signals transmission. Fixed to ON.
Desk Console Key Pattern. Set SW17-3 and SW17-4 according to SYS 1, Index 6. 3 SW17 4
SYS 1 INDEX 6 SW17-3 SW17-4 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
5~7 8 Note Note:
OFF ON OFF
Fixed to OFF. Start up in Night mode after circuit card initialization. Start up in Day mode after circuit card initialization.
DESK CONSOLE starts up in Day or Night mode according to this setting after the circuit card initialization, regardless of the mode before the initialization.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Location of the LT connector leads for the DESK CONSOLE interface is as shown in Figure 3-57.
Mounting Module
PIM
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
LT5, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Note:
The lead for each ADD ON CONSOLE is shown below.
BN4800 BN4820 BN4810 BN4830 B0 B2 B1 B3
BN4801 BN4821
Note:
The lead for each DESK CONSOLE is shown below.
#0 ADD ON MODULE A0 B0 BN4800 - 48v BN4801 - 48v
#1 ADD ON MODULE A1 B1 BN4810 - 48v BN4811 - 48v
BN4811 BN4831 A0 A2 A1 A3 #0 DESK CONSOLE A2 B2 BN4820 - 48v BN4821 - 48v #1 DESK CONSOLE A3 B3 BN4830 - 48v BN4831 - 48v
LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 19 23 14 18 22 13 17 21 12 16 20 15 19 23 14 18 22 13 17 21 12 16 20
01 03 05 07 09 11
Group No.
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 02 04 06 08 10
ATI
ATI
PIM
NDA-24296
PBX Installation Cable ATI A2 B2 BN4820 BN4821 (-48V) (-48V) A2 B2 BN4820 BN4821 GND GND
MDF
IDF
6-PIN MODULAR ROSETTE
#0 DESK CONSOLE
6-PIN MODULAR CABLE
#1 DESK CONSOLE A3 B3 BN4830 BN4831 A3 B3 BN4830 BN4831 GND GND
GND (PZ-M377)
Figure 3-58 Connecting Route Diagram Note:
The power feeding wires (BN4820/BN4821/BN4830/BN4831/GND) are not required when the power is supplied to the DESK CONSOLE locally.
NDA-24296
Figure 3-59 shows how to connect Desk Console. Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.
Bottom View
6-core Modular Cable

PAGE LINE (8-core) REC (6-core) (8-core)
6-core Modular Block
IDF/MDF
DESK CONSOLE
PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

PIN LEAD PIN LEAD No. NAME No. NAME 26 1 27 2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
DESK CONSOLE
Desk Console Modular Jack Transformer Surge Protection
6-core Modular Cable

GND - 48 V A1 B1
BN4800 BN4820
BN4801 BN4821
BN4810 BN4830 B2 B0 B1 B3
BN4811 BN4831 A0 A2 A1 A3 Add-on for Console 0 Console 0 Add-on for Console 1 Console 1
DC/DC Convertor
GND 48V/24V
GND - 48 V
Note:
GND wires should be connected to PZ-M77. (BASE-U)
Figure 3-59 Desk Console Connection
Power supply and the maximum distance between the ATI and Desk Console. The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and Desk Console is as shown below.
Source PBX Local Power Supply 0.5 Cable 1,148 ft. (350 m) 3,937 ft. (1,200 m) 0.65 Cable 1,640 ft. (500 m) 4,921 ft. (1,500 m)
NDA-24296
If the distance exceeds the above, estimate it according to the calculation after Figure 3-60.
m A PBX Installation Cable

A2 B2 BN4820 (-48V) BN4821 (-48V)
C
6-pin Modular rosette
A B BN4820 BN4821
MDF
IDF
#0 DESK CONSOLE
ATI
6-pin Modular Cable
GND GND
#1 DESK CONSOLE
A3 B3 BN4830 BN4831 A B BN4830 BN4831 GND GND
GND (PZ-M377)
Figure 3-60 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console
NDA-24296
Calculation of the distance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette The distance M in the figure above is determined according to the Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 as shown in the following formula: m = a + b + c < 26 = m: Maximum Direct-Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette a: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of A b: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of B c: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of C Example of Calculation a, b, and c are calculated by the following formulae:
Note:
You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae.You may use cable lengths in feet, yards, or whatever units you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units of length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot. Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables u (/m) x (m) u (/m) x (m) +
21 No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables
a=
b=
Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables v (/m) y (m) v (/m) y (m) +
c=
Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables w (/m) z (m) w (/m) z (m) +
u: DC resistance per meter in the range of A (/m) v: DC resistance per meter in the range of B (/m) w: DC resistance per meter in the range of C (/m) x: Cable length (m) in the range of A y: Cable length (m) in the range of B z: Cable length (m) in the range of C
NDA-24296
The location of the LT connector leads for the TAS interface is as shown in Figure 3-61.
Mounting Module
PIM
PIM
LT5, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
TAS1B TAS0B
TAS1A TAS0A
LT5 LT0
Slot No.
LT11
LT1
LT2
LT3
LT4
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
ATI
ATI
PIM
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
SW00
OFF
SW01
ON ON
SW10 (TAS #0)
1 2 3 4
SW13 (TAS #1)
1 2 3 4
ON
SW11 (TAS #0)

OFF ON
SW12 (TAS #0)

OFF ON
SW14 (TAS #1)

OFF ON
SW15 (TAS #1)

OFF ON
SW16
12 34 56 78
ON
SW17
12 34 56 78
ON
NDA-24296
PA-8LCBR Line Circuit
PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-8LCBR circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of eight analog voice terminals and the system with a range of 1200 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, polarity reverse function is provided for each channel. This card can be used for Caller ID service.
INT PUBLIC NETWORK C.O. Line COT
SW
(PA-8LC BR) Analog Terminal LC max. 1200 []
Loop Resistance : Max. 1200 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 8 circuits Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)
Figure 3-62 Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-63.
OPE SW00 (MB) BL7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SW11 SW12
SW13 SW14
SW15 SW16
SW01 SW10
Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-8LCBR (8LC)
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green
STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting
MEANING The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
BL0 Green
BL7
Flashing
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switches on this circuit card have the following meanings.
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel Fixed Fixed
1 SW10 2 3 4 SW11 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 SW14 2
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
SW12
Fixed
SW13
Fixed Momentary Open Polarity Reverse Message Waiting Lamp flashes (1-sec. ON, 1-sec. OFF) Message Waiting Lamp lights or flashes (Selected and Controlled by software)
1 SW15 2 1 Note 1 SW16 2 Note 2
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Fixed Stutter Dial Tone is available Stutter Dial Tone is not available Ringer Timer mode: Common mode Ringer Timer mode: Separate mode Pre-ringing is not available Pre-ringing is available
OFF
Note 1: When Caller ID is in service, set SW16-1 to OFF (Separate mode). Note 2: Valid when SW16-1 is set to ON (Common mode).
NDA-24296
SWITCH Balancing Network Designation Each element corresponds to circuits 0 - 7.
SETTING
ON
SW01 (BNW0 - 7)
12 34 5 678
OFF ON
BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) For long distance
BNW: 600 For short distance
OFF
Note:
Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 are composed as follows.
BNW2 (ON)
350 1000
BNW1 (OFF)
600 0.21
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown Figure 3-64.
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT2
LT4
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
MDF NEAX2400 IPX
A0 LC B0
L1 L2 Rosette Telephone
NDA-24296
7.
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS
12 34
ON
SW10
SW01 (BNW 0 - 7)
12 34 567 8
ON
1 2
ON
SW11
Fixed
1 2
ON
PIM
SW12
Fixed
1 2
ON
SW13
Fixed
1 2
ON
SW14
1 2
ON
SW15
1 2
ON
SW16
NDA-24296
PA-16LCBE Line Circuit
PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit
1. General Function This circuit card provides the interface for 16 station lines. This circuit card is provided with functions for supervising each user's call origination, call answering, release, detection of switch hook flashing, relaying of DP/PB signals, transmission of ringing signals to the called side, and bothway transmissions of voice band signals. For use of this circuit card, there are the following limitations. (a) There are four kinds of balancing network, each of which is set up according to the line conditions involved. (b) PAD is only for receiving side 5 dB (at the time of station to station call).
TSW COT C.O. Line
16LC
(MAX. 16 Stations)
Figure 3-66 Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.
OPE MB BL15 SW1
BL0
SW0
BNW8-15
BNW0-7
Figure 3-67 Face Layout of PA-16LCBE (16LC)
4.
LAMP NAME OPE BL0
COLOR Green Green Flash OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is opening. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes (60 IPM) to dial pulses at the time of an outgoing call or when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
BL1S
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Circuit card make busy.
Circuit card make busy cancel. Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed
1 2 SW0 3 4
OFF OFF OFF OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For long distance.
Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For short distance. Note:
OFF ON
OFF ON
4 BNW0 ~ 7 5
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF
Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF. However, when the station line is long (PBX Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting referring to the following table.
TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE LINE RESISTANCE BALANCING NETWORK LINE RESISTANCE SWITCH
Short Distance Long Distance
0 ~ 100 More than 100
OFF ON
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For long distance.
Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For short distance. Note:
OFF ON
OFF ON
4 BNW8 ~ 15 5
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF
Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF. However, when the station line is long (PBX Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting referring to the following table.
TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE LINE RESISTANCE BALANCING NETWORK LINE RESISTANCE SWITCH
Short Distance Long Distance
0 ~ 100 More than 100
OFF ON
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Polarity Reversal as Disconnect Signal

SW1-4
Momentary Open as Disconnect Signal Fixed
OFF
SW1-3
INTERRUPTED RINGER PATTERN 0.4/0.2/0.4-ON/OFF/ON Incoming call from C. O. line/station
3
OFF (standard) OFF (standard)
0.4
0.4
2.0
0.2
Rering
0.4 0.2 0.8 0.4 0.2 4.0
0.2/0.2/0.2/0.2-ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON Incoming call from C. O. line/station

0.2 0.2 0.2 2.0
OFF
ON
0.2 0.2
Rering
SW1
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
0.4
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
4.0
0.35/0.3/0.35-ON/OFF/ON Incoming call from C. O. line/station

0.35 0.35
2.0
ON
OFF
Rering
0.3
0.35
0.7
0.35
4.0
0.3
0.3
0.2/0.4/0.2-ON/OFF/ON Incoming call from C. O. line/station

0.2 0.2 2.2
ON
ON
0.4
Rering
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.2 4.2
0.2 0.4
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 5
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW1-5
SW1-6
SWITCH SETTING FOR MW LAMP CONTROLLING
6 SW1 ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
OFF OFF ON
OFF ON OFF
In the case of lighting (normal setting) In the case of 60 IPM flashing In the case of lighting or flashing (As controlled by the software)
Stutter Dial Tone Available
Stutter Dial Tone Not Available Pre-signaling is not performed. Pre-signaling is performed.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-68 below.
Mounting Module
PIM
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
MDF NEAX2400 IPX A0 B0 L1 L2 Rosette Ordinary Telephone
LC
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MODULE
SW0
ON
12 3 4
SW1
ON
1 23 456 78
PIM BNW0-7
ON 1 23 456 78
BNW8-15
ON
1 23 456 78
MB
DOWN
Circuit card make busy cancel.
NDA-24296
PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit
PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16LCBJ-A circuit card,which is exclusively used in a -law system, provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance.This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.
SW
(PA-16LC BJ-A) Analog Terminal LC max. 600 []
Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 1 circuits Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp (selectable) Encoding Law : -law.
Figure 3-70 Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
SW13 OPE SW00 (MB) BL12-15 BL8-11
BL4-7
BL0-3
SW12
SW11 SW10 (BNW8-15) (BNW0-7)
Figure 3-71 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green
STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting
MEANING The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3)Line is in make-busy state. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
BL0 Green BL15
Flashing
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Circuit card make busy. Circuit card make busy cancel. CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK
ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW10 (BNW0~7) 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
Compromise
No. 0
600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK Compromise No. 8 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600
OFF ON
No. 9
OFF ON
No. 10
4 SW11 (BNW8~15) 5
OFF ON OFF ON
No. 11
No. 12
OFF ON
No. 13
OFF ON
No. 14
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
No. 15
1 SW12 2
Immediate is not available. Immediate is available. Stutter dial tone is available Message Waiting Lamp is available Momentary Open Polarity Reverse
SW13
NDA-24296
6.
Mounting Module
PIM
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
MDF NEAX2400 IPX A0 B0 L1 L2 Rosette Ordinary Telephone
LC
NDA-24296
7.
MODULE SLOT No.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
ON
UP : Circuit card make busy
SW10 (BNW 0 - 7)
0 123 45 67
ON
PIM
SW11 (BNW 8 - 15)
0 123 45 67
ON
SW12
12
ON
OFF
ON
SW13
(RVS) (OPEN)
NDA-24296
PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit
PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16LCBJ-B circuit card, which is exclusively used in a -law system, provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.
SW
(PA-16LC BJ-B) Analog Terminal LC max. 600 []
Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 1 circuit Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp Encoding Law : -law
Figure 3-74 Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-75.
SW16
OPE MB BL15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4
SW15 SW13
3 2 1 0
SW10
SW11
Figure 3-75 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC)
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green
STATE Steady Lighting Steady Lighting
MEANING The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3)Line is in make-busy state. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
BL0 Green BL15
Flashing
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16LC BJ-B card have the following meanings.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING Card make-busy (Inserted state) Card make-busy cancel (Operating state) Fixed to OFF Stutter dial tone is available Stutter dial tone is not available Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Message waiting lamp flashes (1-sec. ON/1-sec. OFF) Message waiting lamp lights or flashes (controlled by software) Fixed to OFF Momentary open Polarity reverse
SWITCH NAME SW00(MB)
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
1 SW13
ON 12 34
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
2 3 4 1
SW15
ON 12 34
3 OFF 4 SW16 OFF ON OFF

OFF (RVS) ON (OPEN)
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SETTING
ON
SW-10 (BNW0 - 7)
12 34 567 8
Balancing Network Designation Each element corresponds to circuits 0 - 7.
OFF ON
BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) for long distance
BNW: 600 for short distance
w w
OFF ON
SW-11 (BNW8 - 15)

12 34 567 8
Balancing Network Designation Each element corresponds to circuits 8 - 15.
OFF ON
BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) for long distance
BNW: 600 for short distance
w w
OFF
Note:
Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 are composed as follows.
ON
350 1000
OFF
600 0.21 compromise impedance (EIA/TIA-464A)
NDA-24296
6.
Mounting Module
PIM
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
MDF NEAX2400 IPX
A0 LC B0
L1 L2 Rosette Telephone
NDA-24296
7.
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
ON
SW13
12 34
ON
SW15
12 34
ON
PIM
OFF ON
SW16
(RVS) (OPEN)
SW10 (BNW0-7)
0 12 3 45 67
ON
SW11 (BNW8-15)
01 23 456 7
ON
NDA-24296
PA-16LCBW Line Circuit
PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16LCBW circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and the system with a range of 1200 inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition momentary open/reverse battery function is provided for 16 channels on this card. This is a -48V card.
INT PUBLIC NETWORK C. O. line
SW
COT
(PA-16LCBW) Analog Terminal max. 1200 [] LC
Loop Resistance: Max. 1200 [] (inclusive of terminal Resistance) Open Function: x 15 circuits Reverse / Open Function: x 1 circuit (selectable) Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable) Encoding Law: -law
I/O Local Bus CPU GT
Figure 3-78 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16LCBW (LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-79.
3.
OPE SW00 (MB) SW18 BL15
BL0
SW17
SW16 SW15
SW14
SW10
SW11
Figure 3-79 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
LAMP COLOR Green
LAMP STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting
MEANING OF INDICATION The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
BL0
Green Flashing
BL15
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16LCBW card have the following meanings.
SWITCH SW00 (MB) FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING ON Circuit Card Make-busy Key OFF MEANING Circuit card make-busy Circuit card make-busy cancel (Normal operating mode) North America, Other Country ( Law) BNW : Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) (Note) for long distance. North America, Other Country ( Law) BNW : 600 (Note) for short distance
SW10 (BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Balancing Network Designation

ON OFF
ON
Each element on this switch OFF corresponds to circuit #0-#7.
Note:
Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600 . (For North America, Other Country ( Law))
ON OFF
350
1000 0.21 600
Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW11 (BNW8-15)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SWITCH No.
FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING
MEANING
ON OFF
Balancing Network Designation Each element on this (This same as previous page) switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15. 1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Stutter Dial Tone Available Stutter Dial Tone not Available Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF
SW14
1 2 3 4
ON OFF
2 3 4 1
SW15
1 2 3 4
ON
2
OFF
3 4
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW16
1 2 3 4
No. 1
FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
MEANING Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) Fixed to OFF Momentary open Polarity reverse
ON OFF
2 3 4 1 2
SW17
1 2 3 4
ON OFF
Message Waiting Lamp OFF
4 SW18 Polarity reverse or Momentary Open (circuit #15 Only )
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF (RVS) (OPEN) Slide switch
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-80.
Mounting Module
PIM
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-81).
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBW (LC) is as follows.

MDF PBX Installation Cable LC LT Connector A B L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal
Maximum 1200 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance)
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON
MODULE SLOT No. PIM
REMARKS
SW10 (BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW11 (BNW8-15)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW14
1 2 3 4
ON
SW15
1 2 3 4
ON
SW16
1 2 3 4
ON
SW17
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
ON
SW18
(RVS) (OPEN)
NDA-24296
PA-16LCBY Line Circuit
PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16LCBY circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and the system with a range of 1200 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition polarity reverse function is provided for 16 channels on this card. The card can be used for Caller ID service. This is a -48V card.
Note:
The PA-16LCBY card requires Series 7400 or later software.
TSW/INT
PUBLIC NETWORK
C. O. LINE COT
(PA-16LCBY) LC
(PA-8RSTY) RST
Analog Terminal
max. 1200 []
Loop Resistance : Max 1200[] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 16 circuits Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable) Encoding Law : -law
Figure 3-82 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16LCBY(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-83.
OPE SW00 (MB) BL15
SW19 BL0 SW17 SW16 SW15 SW14
SW10 (BNW0-7)
SW11 (BNW8-15)
Figure 3-83 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
LAMP COLOR Green
LAMP STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting
MEANING OF INDICATION The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
BL0 ~ BL15
Green Flashing
5.
Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16LCBY (LC) card have the following meanings.
SWITCH SW00 (MB) FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING OFF Circuit Card Make-busy Key ON Circuit card make-busy MEANING Circuit card make-busy cancel
SW10 (BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Balancing Network Designation Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #0-#7. When this switch has been set, see SW14.
ON
North America, Other Country ( Law) BNW : Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) (Note ) for long distance
ON OFF
OFF
North America, Other Country ( Law) (Note ) BNW : 600 for short distance
NDA-24296

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.
FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING
MEANING
ON OFF
Balancing Network Designation Each element on this [the same as previous page] switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15. 1 OFF ON OFF OFF North America Brazil China Other Country 1 ON PAD (Australia Only) OFF 2 3 4 ON OFF OFF OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF
SW14
1 2 3 4
ON OFF
2 3 4
SW15
1 2 3 4
ON OFF
OFF
Fixed to OFF
NEAX 2400 PAD PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/0dB ICS-PBX PAD PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/6dB Stutter Dial Tone Available Stutter Dial Tone not Available Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW16
1 2 3 4
No. 1
FUNCTION
MEANING Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF
ON OFF
2 3 4 1 2
SW17
1 2 3 4
ON OFF
4 SW19
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
1
ON OFF
2 3 4
NDA-24296
PA-16LCBY Line Circuit Note:
Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600. (For North America, Other Country ( Law))
ON OFF
350
1000 0.21 600
Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)
NDA-24296
6.
Mounting Module
PIM
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBY (LC) is as follows.

MDF PBX Installation Cable LC LT Connector A B L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal
NDA-24296
7.

ON
MODULE SLOT No. PIM
REMARKS
Note:
SW10 (BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW11 (BNW8-15)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
SW14
1 2 3 4
ON
SW15
1 2 3 4
ON
SW16
1 2 3 4
ON
SW17
1 2 3 4
ON
SW19
1 2 3 4
ON
NDA-24296
PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current
PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current
1. General Function The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between the D term and the IPX. Depending on the switch settings, this card works in the following two modes. 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications only) 8 DLC mode: A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice and data communications)
16 ELC MODE
IPX IMX
8 DLC MODE IMX IPX

#0
term
DTE
#0
term
ELC
Data Adapter ELC
DTE
D
term #15
term
#7
Data Adapter
Figure 3-86 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System
There are two different kinds of firmware EPROMs are located on the PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card. SP3295 16ELCJ PROG-B provides the full performance interface for D term Series E, and SP-3270 16ELCJ PROG-A provides Dterm Series III interface. The following table shows the D term performance depending on each firmware EPROM.
Table 3-3 Performance FIRMWARE SP-3295 16ELC J PROG-B Dterm SERIES E 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). 16 digits wide of LCD. Month and year are not displayed. Software key is not available. Dterm SERIES III
Month and year (last two digits) also displayed following the time and date. Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data. 16 digits wide of LCD. Month and year are not displayed.
SP-3270 16ELC J PROG-A
16 digits wide of LCD. Month and year are not displayed. Software key is not available.
Software keys are available. However, key function is fixed (Off-hook Ringing, Mute, Microphone, Headset).
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
3.
OPE SW00 (MB) PALM BL15
BL0
SW01
Figure 3-87 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green OFF Red OFF Green
STATE Remains lit while on-line operations are normal. Off when on-line operations are abnormal. Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note Off when all the power supply circuits are normal. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state or station data has not been assigned. Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
PALM
BL0 Flash OFF Note:

-
BL15
When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions. Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit in all lines which belong to the PA-16ELCJ card whose PALM is on. ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm. iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute. iv) Connect the Dterm again. i)
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16ELCJ card have the following meanings.
SWITCH
FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING
MEANING Circuit card Make-busy Cancel.
SW00 (MB) Circuit Card Makebusy key
Circuit card Make-busy.

ON
12345678
1
OFF
See Table 3-4 below.

ON
SW01
12345678
2 6 8
12345678
Always ON (fixed).
OFF 12345678 ON
16ELC mode. 7 ELC/DLC mode Designation

OFF 12345678 ON
8DLC mode.
OFF
Table 3-4 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7
SW01-7 SW01-1
ON OFF
ON 16 sets of Dterms per card. Voice Communication only. 16 sets of Dterms per card. Analog Port Adapter is used, but not at the same time.
OFF 8 sets of Dterms per card. Data Adapter is used. 8 sets of Dterms per card. Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and Analog terminal can be used at the same time).
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Depending on the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT connectors as follows. 6ELC mode
Mounting Module
PIM
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2)
NDA-24296
16ELC mode
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2)
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON
MODULE
REMARKS
PIM SW01
12345678 ON
NDA-24296
PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit
PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between D term and IPX. Depending upon the switch settings, this card works in the following two modes. 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications only) 8 DLC mode: A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice and data communications)
16 ELC MODE IPX
D
term #0
8 DLC MODE IPX

#0
DTE
term
ELC
Data Adapter
ELC
DTE
D
term #15
term
#7
Data Adapter
Figure 3-89 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System Table 3-5 Performance Dterm SERIES E 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). Month and year is displayed following the time and date. Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data. Dterm SERIES III 16 digits wide of LCD. Month and year are not displayed. Software key is not available.
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
3.
OPE SW00 (MB) PALM BL15
BL0 SW10 SW11
Figure 3-90 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green OFF Red OFF Green
STATE Remains lit while on-line operations are normal. Off when on-line operations are abnormal. Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note Off when all the power supply circuits are normal. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or station data has not been assigned. Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
PALM
BL0 Flash OFF Note:

-
BL15
When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions. Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit to all lines belonging to the PA-16ELCJ-B card whose PALM is on. ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm. iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute. iv) Connect the Dterm again. i)
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16ELCJ-B card have the following meanings.
SWITCH SW00 (MB)
FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING
MEANING Circuit Card Make-busy Cancel.
Circuit Card Makebusy key Circuit Card Make-busy. SW10

ON OFF
12345678
LP-PM Interface mode setting
When firmware SP-3419 is used, and your system uses software Series 7300 Release 7 or earlier. Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is not available. When firmware SP-3514 is used, and your system uses software Series 7400 Release 8 or later. Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is available. Not used.
12345678
ON OFF
12345678
ON OFF
12345678
ON
This circuit card is operated in 16 ELC mode.

OFF
Details are shown in the next table.
3-4
ELC/DLC mode setting
12345678
ON
This circuit card is operated in 8 DLC mode.

OFF
Do not set another combination.

12345678 ON
Analog Port Adapter is available. 5 Analog Port Adapter setting

OFF 12345678 ON
Analog Port Adapter is not available.

OFF 12345678 ON
6-8 SW11 1-8
OFF 12345678 ON
Fixed to OFF.
OFF
Fixed to all OFF.
NDA-24296
SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: OFF SW10-5: OFF SW10-5: ON 16 set of Dterms per card. Voice Communication only. 16 set of D
term
SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: ON 8 set of Dterms per card. Data Adapter is used. 8 set of Dterms per card.
s per card.
Analog Port Adapter is used (Either Dterm or Analog terminal can be used at the same time).
Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and Analog terminal can be used at the same time).
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Depending upon the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT connectors as follows. 16ELC mode
Mounting Module
PIM
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2)
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2)
NDA-24296
8DLC mode
Mounting Module
PIM
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
LT2
LT4
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-92 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode)
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON
MODULE
REMARKS
PIM
SW10
12345678
ON
SW11
12345678
ON
NDA-24296
PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler
PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler
1. General Function This circuit card is a protocol converter to carry the fusion-link-data from/to the other node. The FusionLink-Data is received/transferred from/to the CPR via HUB (PA-M96) across the TCP/IP interface. Once the FCH has received the fusion-link-data from the CPR, the HDLC CONT part of the FCH converts it to the High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) format, then drops and inserts (D/I) onto a particular channel (or channels) of the ITU-T G.703 digital interface.
RJ-45 ETHER NET CONT CPU HDLC CONT
BWB LP-PM INT
FRONT CABLE D/I CONT DTI CONT FCH Note
TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE
DTI
HUB (PA-M96)
CPU CPR
LANI (PZ-PC19)
Note:
This connector is used when multiple numbers of FCH cards are cascaded.
Figure 3-93 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/ Condition The FCH can be mounted in a universal slot of the PIM.
Mounting Module
PIM PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
3.
OPE MB LYR LB LOAD

EST3 EST2 EST1 EST0 PWALM
SW14 SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10
1 2 3 4
MNT 10-BASE-T MODE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DTI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 3-94 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green Green
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while the Fusion link is established. Flashes when the Fusion link test result is fair. (60IPM) Remains off when either the Fusion link is not established or the Fusion link test result is not fair. Remains lit while 10-BASE-T port is ready to use. Remains off when 10-BASE-T port is not ready. Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets. (Forwarding Status) Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets. (Blocking Status) Remains lit while this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets. (Learning Status) Remains off when this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets. (Null Status) Remains lit while sending data. Remains lit when receiving pair cable polarity is normal. Remains lit while receiving data. Remains lit while the link is established. Remains lit when power supply failure (from the BWB) has occurred.
LYR
Flash OFF Green
LB OFF Green Flash (60 IPM) LOAD Flash (120 IPM) OFF EST3 EST2 EST1 EST0 PWALM Green Green Green Green Red
NDA-24296
5.
Switch setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME MB Note
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION Circuit card Make-busy.
Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Not used. Not used. Not used. Make-busy-request.
0 1 MNT 2 3 Note Note:
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Cancel the Make-busy-request.
The following operations are required prior to extracting the card. (1.) Turn on the MNT3 switch. (2.) Flip the MB switch.
SWITCH NAME
SETTING 0-7 8
STANDARD SETTING Not used.
DESCRIPTION
Standard setting. (When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.) Fusion link test mode. (When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.) Not used.
MODE 9 A-F
When the D/I DTI (1.5M) is connected with the card front cable.
SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 Note 2~8 Note: STANDARD SETTING
SETTING ON OFF OFF
DESCRIPTION T203 timer value is variable.
SW10
T203 timer value is fixed at 10 seconds. Not used.
T203 timer designates the maximum idle time which does not transmit any data frames. As a basic rule, the shorter T203 timer value, the earlier link failure detection will be obtained.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION
This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) Set the corresponding SW(s) to ON for D/I, OFF for denial.
SW11 D/I channel of T1
2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW11 Note 1 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

SW11-1 SW11-2 SW11-3 SW11-4 SW11-5 SW11-6 SW11-7 SW11-8 CH 0 CH 1 CH2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 CH 7
NDA-24296
PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF SW12 Note 1 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
SW12-6 SW12-7 SW12-8 CH 13 CH 14 CH 15
SW12 D/I channel of T1
SETTING ON
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) Set the corresponding SW(s) to ON for D/I, OFF for denial.
SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 SW12-4 SW12-5
CH 8 CH 9 CH 10 CH 11 CH 12
Note 1: When n is bigger than 1, the Time Slot Sequence Integrity (TSSI) must be guaranteed at the network.
When n is one or more, the corresponding D channels as n must be designated by SW11-SW12.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
DESCRIPTION
This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) Set the corresponding SW(s) to ON for D/I, OFF for denial.
2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF SW13 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 Note 2 OFF SW14 ON 3 Note 2 OFF ON OFF
SW13
D/I channel of T1
SW13-1 SW13-2 SW13-3 SW13-4 SW13-5 SW13-6 SW13-7 SW13-8
CH 16 CH 17 CH 18 CH 19 CH 20 CH 21 CH 22 CH 23
Positive logic for the D/I CONT Negative logic for the D/I CONT The fusion data link speed inserted onto the T1 interface.
SW14-2 SW14-3 SPEED
ON ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
64 Kbps n 56 Kbps n 48 Kbps n Not used
4 Note 3
Link Access Protocol D-channel (LAPD) signal link performs as the network. LAPD signal link performs as the user.
NDA-24296
PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler Note 2: Data speed 64 kbps is used for the T1 or E1 interface.
Data speed 56 kbps is used for the T1 interface with bit stealing. Data speed 48 kbps is used for the T1 interface with both bit stealing and the Zero Code Suppression (or Bit 7 Stuffing).
Note 3: When a node is set network, the distant node over the fusion link should be set user, and vice versa.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface The cable connections among the FCH, HUB, 24DTR are shown below.
FCH
24DTR
DTI
FCH
CN2
10AL (10) FLT CA
10 BASE-T straight cable
HUB
Figure 3-95 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection
NDA-24296
See Figure 3-96 when multiple numbers of FCH circuit cards are connected to a 24DTR as a cascade connection. The FCH can be combined with CCH/DCH on a cascade connection. One DTI card can have a maximum of five (5) Handler circuits cascaded within the FCH card, the CCH card, and/or DCH card. Since the FCH card contains one Handler circuit per card, a maximum of five (5) FCH cards can be cascaded to a DTI card. As an example, the following (a), (b) and (c) can coexist on a cascade connection. (a) FCH card (One (1) Handler circuit card per card) (b) CCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card) (c) DCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card) Also, you must consider the cascading cable length. (Note)
Max. 5 handling circuits of FCH/CCH/DCH
Note
24DTR
FCH
FCH
FCH
DTI
DTI
DTI
CN2
FCH
FCH
FCH
To the next FCH/CCH/DCH
To HUB
Figure 3-96 FCH Cascade Connection Note:
A maximum cable distance between DTI and the last cascaded FCH (or CCH/DCH) is 50 cm (1 7.6 ).
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
OFF
MNT
ON
MODE
SW10
12 34 567 8
ON
1 23 4 56 78
ON
SW11
SW12
12 34 56 78
ON
SW13
1 234 56 78
ON
SW14
1 2 3 4
ON
NDA-24296
PA-24LCBV Line Circuit
PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-24LCBV circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 24-analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.
INT
SW
PUBLIC NETWORK
C. O. LINE COT
(PA-24LCBV) LC
Analog Terminal
max. 600 []
Loop Resistance : Max 600[] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 1 circuit Stutter Dial Tone Message Waiting Lamp Encoding Law : -law
Figure 3-97 Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24LCBV(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-98.
SW18
OPE2 OPE1 SW00 (MB)

BL23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BL23
SW11 (BNW8-15)
SW10 (BNW0-7)
BL0
CN SW13 SW12 (BNW16-23) SW15 SW16 SW17
SW14
Figure 3-98 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card
4.
Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this card are shown below.
LED NAME OPE1 OPE2
COLOR Green Green
LED STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting Steady Lighting
DESCRIPTION The circuitry of circuit #0-#7 is operating normally. The circuitry of circuit #8-#23 is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1. Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.
BL0 Green
BL23
Flashing
2. Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3. Line is in Make-busy state. 4. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switches on the PA-24LCBV (LC) card have the following meanings.
SWITCH SW00 (MB)
ON
FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING
ON
MEANING Circuit card Make-busy cancel
OFF Circuit Card Make-busy Key ON

ON
Circuit card Make-busy
SW10 (BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON OFF
ON
North America, Other Country (A/ Law) BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) (Note 1) for long distance.
Each element on this switch corresponds to OFF circuit #0-#7.
North America, Other Country (A/ Law) BNW : 600 (Note 1) for short distance

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.
FUNCTION Balancing Network Designation
SWITCH SETTING
MEANING
ON OFF
Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15.
The same as previous table.
SW12 (BMW16-23)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON OFF
Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #16-#23.
The same as previous table.
SW13
1 2 3 4
ON OFF
Selection of the User
SW13 SW13 SW13 SW13 -1 -2 -3 -4 ON OFF OFF OFF
North America
1 SW14
1 2 3 4
OFF Stutter Dial Tone ON OFF OFF OFF
Fixed to OFF Stutter Dial tone Available Stutter Dial tone not Available Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF
ON OFF
2 3 4
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW15
1 2 3 4
No. 1
FUNCTION
MEANING Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF
ON OFF
2 3 4 1 2
SW16
1 2 3 4
ON
3
OFF
4 1 2 SW17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
3
ON OFF
4 5 6 7 8
SWITCH SW18
No.
FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING ON
MEANING Momentary open Polarity reverse
ON OFF (RVS) (OPEN) Slide switch
Polarity reverse or Momentary Open OFF
Note 1: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 are as follows. ON OFF
350
1000 0.21 600
Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464A)
CHAPTER 3 Page 384 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
6.

ON
MODULE SLOT No.
REMARKS
Note:
SW10 (BNW0-7)
12 34 56 78
ON
SW11 (BNW8-15)
12 34 56 78
ON
SW12 (BNW16-23)
12 34 56 78
ON
ON
SW13 PIM
12 34
ON
SW14
12 34
ON
SW15
12 34
ON
SW16
12 34
SW17
12 34 56 78
ON
OFF
ON
SW18
(RVS) (OPEN)
NDA-24296
7.
External Interface Location of the LT connector leads and LC connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-99. (a) PIM When this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows.
Accommodated in 1 LT 4, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4
Accommodated in 2 LT 5, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2)
NDA-24296
LT 4, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0
Accommodated in 3 LT 5, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23
B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15
A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2)
NDA-24296
(b) LC Connector Leads

LC Connector (1) CONN1
1A 2A 3A PKG1 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 LC CABLE 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
Champ Connector LT
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 PKG3 PKG2 PKG1

1A 2A 3A PKG2 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

1A 2A 3A PKG3 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7
47 48 49 50
Figure 3-100 LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable)
NDA-24296
8.
Connecting Route Diagram Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV(LC) is as follows. A and B leads for channels #0 - #7 appear from the LC Connector located on the front edge of the card.
LT Connector PBX Installation Cable A8

PA-24LCBV
MDF
L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal
B8
A23 B23
L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal
Maximum 600 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Installation Cable A0 B0 LT Connector LC Cable A7 B7 L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal
NDA-24296
9.
LC Cable Connection
3m (9.8 feet)
Earth Cable
Figure 3-102 Outer View of LC Cable
NDA-24296
PA-24LCBV
LC Cable LC Cable
LC Cable
Earth Plate
FRO
NT
LT Cable
Earth Cable
REA
Figure 3-103 Cable Running for LC Cable (Example)
NDA-24296
PA-M69 Power Failure Transfer
PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer
1. General Function This circuit card executes a C.O. line to the telephone or the release of a C.O. line due to a power supply failure, system down, software order, etc. This circuit card is also provided with the change circuit of 12 circuits.
NCU
MDF TEL TEL (AO, BO)
MDF LC (AI, BI)
LC
TSW
COT
MDF TRK (TI, RI)
MDF CO (TO, RO)
(NITE KEY) ATTCON
Position within the System
Figure 3-104 Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-M69
NDA-24296
PA-M69
3.
Face Layout of Lamp, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamp, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-105.
OPE MB
NCU1
SW0 NCU0
Figure 3-105 Face Layout of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU)
4.
Lamp Indication The contents of lamp indication of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green
STATE Remains lit even when PFT is being activated on any one of the 12 circuits.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME
SETTING UP DOWN
MB 1 SW0 2 3 4
Circuit card make busy cancel Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed
ON OFF OFF OFF
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card, accommodation of the NCU connector on the front side of the circuit card, and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-106.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 6 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 KY1 KY3 KY5 KY7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 LT4 KY0 KY2 KY4 KY6
LT0
LT1
LT2
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
NCU Connector Accommodation CHAMP Connector NCU0 Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 BO00 BI00 TO00 TI00 BO01 BI01 TO01 TI01 BO02 BI02 TO02 TI02 BO03 BI03 TO03 TI03 BO04 BI04 TO04 TI04 BO05 BI05 TO05 TI05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 AO00 AI00 RO00 RI00 AO01 AI01 RO01 RI01 AO02 AI02 RO02 RI02 AO03 AI03 RO03 RI03 AO04 AI04 RO04 RI04 AO05 AI05 RO05 RI05 Station No. 0 C.O. Line Station No. 1 C.O. Line Station No. 2 C.O. Line Station No. 3 C.O. Line Station No. 4 C.O. Line Station No. 5 C.O. Line TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 BO06 BI06 TO06 TI06 BO07 BI07 TO07 TI07 BO08 BI08 TO08 TI08 BO09 BI09 TO09 TI09 BO10 BI10 TO10 TI10 BO11 BI11 TO11 TI11 CHAMP Connector NCU1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 AO06 AI06 RO06 RI06 AO07 AI07 RO07 RI07 AO08 AI08 RO08 RI08 AO09 AI09 RO09 RI09 AO10 AI10 RO10 RI10 AO11 AI11 RO11 RI11
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
No. 9
No. 10
No. 11
Figure 3-107 NCU Connector Accommodation
NDA-24296
Front Connector NCU MDF NEAX2400 IPX
PFT
KY0 KY7
KY0 KY7
External Key Box
LC
A B
COT
A B
AO00 BO00 AI00 BI00 RO00 TO00 RI00 TI00
A B
Station
A B
C.O. Line
7.

MODULE
PIM
SW0
ON
12 3 4
MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-M96 HUB
PA-M96
HUB
1. General Function This circuit card provides the repeater function which is based on ANSI/IEEE 802.3. Eight (8) of the 10BASE-T ports are located on a HUB card. As seen from the functional connection diagram below, the HUB card is located between the CPR (LANI) and the FCH card. The HUB card distributes the Fusion link data onto FCH cards.
TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE DTI
FCH
10BASE-T cross cable is used HUB for cascade connection (PA-M96) CPU CPR #0 LANI (PZ-PC19)
CPU CPR #1
LANI (PZ-PC19) HUB (PA-M96) 10BASE-T straight cable
FCH
TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE DTI
Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration. Figure 3-109 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System
NDA-24296
PA-M96 HUB
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-M96 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM0 as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PIM0
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
3.
OPE MB ST7 CRS7
ST0
CRS0 SENS
x TP7-X x TP6-X x TP5-X x TP4-X x TP3-X x TP2-X x TP1-X x TP0-X

Figure 3-110 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card
NDA-24296
PA-M96 HUB
4.
LAMP NAME OPE CRS0~CRS7
COLOR Green Green
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Lights when the circuit card detects the carrier signal form the TPn-X port. The meanings of the ST0~ST7 lamps vary depending on the SEL switch settings as shown in the table below.
SEL SWITCH MEANINGS
Lights when the receiving pair cable polarity of the TPn-X port is reversed. (n = 0~7) Note 1 Lights when the 10 BASE-T (RJ-45) cable is attached to the TPn-X port, and the TCP/IP link has been established. The lamp may light regardless of the receiving pair cable polarity. (n = 0~7) Lights when the TPn-X port is normal. Remains off when collisions have occurred at the TPn-X port. (n = 0~7) Note 2
ST0~ST7
Green
2
Note 1: This lamp is used to indicate the status of the TPn-X port. Therefore, the circuit card operates normally
regardless of the cable polarity.

Note 2: This circuit card can detect data packet collisions at a TPn-X port when it would be a collision of 2048 bit-
times (2.048 ms) or when the packet collides 32 times consecutively. The port is then locked-out until the collision is over.
NDA-24296
PA-M96 HUB
5.
Switch Setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN 0 1
DESCRIPTION
Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Polarity indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7). Not used.
SENSE
2 3 4-F
TPn-X ports operate as a repeater HUB. (n = 0~7). Data-Packet-Collision indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7). Not used.
NDA-24296
PA-M96 HUB
6.
External Interface
FCH DTI
24DTR
HUB FCH CN2
10AL (10) FLT CA 10 BASE-T straight Cable
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
10 BASE-T straight Cable

Figure 3-111 FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection
NDA-24296
PA-M96 HUB
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
SEL
NDA-24296
PA-M103 HUB
PA-M103
HUB
1. General Function This circuit card is a class II HUB card based on IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)/IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX), which is located between 100M Ether card (PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) and FCCH card that establishes Fusion link to the system. This circuit card provides the repeater function, and 12 ports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX are accommodated on one HUB card. The state of each port is indicated on the LED. This card is used in IPX-UMG system.
FCCH
DTI
DTI
FCCH
HUB 10BASE-T
LAN
CMP#1 CPU LAN
LAN 10BASE-T
CPU
CPU
LAN 10BASE-T
HUB
HUB
MAT NIC
Figure 3-112 Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System
NDA-24296
PA-M103 HUB
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-M103 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM as shown below.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
Note:
Related to the length of Ether cable, it is recommended that this card ought to be mounted on the PIM within IMG0/4/8/12 (LPR accommodated IMGs). Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-113.
3.
TXRX L3 LA L9 L8 L7 L6
OPE PWALM L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0 TPB TPA TP9 TP8 TP7 TP6 TP5 TP4 TP3 TP2 TP1 TP0
Figure 3-113 Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card
NDA-24296
PA-M103 HUB
4.
LAMP NAME OPE PWALM L0-L9, LA, LB TXRX
COLOR Green Red Green Green
DESCRIPTION Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation Lights when the OBP (On Board Power) output voltage blownout Link has been established Data packet sending/receiving
5.
NDA-24296
PA-M103 HUB
6.
External Interface
HUB (PA-M103)
PZ-PC22(LANI)
Figure 3-114 External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card
7.
NDA-24296
PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk
PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk
1. General Function This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card which transmits and sends selective signals (DP signals, PB signals, MF signals).
LC
Station
ATI ATT RST TSW
COT
C.O. Line
TLT
Tie Line
Figure 3-115 Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
OPE N-OPE MB
BLS4 ~ BLS7
MBS4
BLR4 ~ ~ ~ BLR7
MBR7 MBR4
BLS3 BLS0
MBS3 SW1 SW0 MBS0

BLR3 BLR0
MBR0
Figure 3-116 Face Layout of PA-8RSTK (8RST)
4.
LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE BLR0
COLOR Green Red Red Flash OFF Red Flash OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle. Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.
BLR7 BLS0 BLS7
NDA-24296
MBR3
MBS7
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Circuit card make busy.
Circuit card make busy cancel. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
OFF ON
1 MBR0~3 2
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
MBR4~7
OFF ON
OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME MBR4~7
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.
OFF ON
Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
OFF ON
1 MBS0~3 2
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
5 MBS4~7 6
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF SW0 ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF 7 8 OFF ON
SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE
-21.7 dBm0 -23.7 dBm0 -25.7 dBm0 -27.7 dBm0 -28.7 dBm0 -31.7 dBm0 -33.7 dBm0 -35.7 dBm0
SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE SW0-4 SW0-5 SW0-6 MFR THRESHOLD VALUE
-21 dBm0 -23 dBm0 -25 dBm0 -27 dBm0 -28 dBm0 -31 dBm0 -33 dBm0 -35 dBm0
Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF). Fixed.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING MFR Receive Specification; AT&T MFR Receive Specification; CCITT No. 5 PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.) PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)
2 OFF 3 SW1 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 7 8 OFF OFF
Fixed Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of MFR. Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of PBR. Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of MFR. Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of PBR.
DPR Receive Specification; General Spec. DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec. No setting (Fixed to OFF) Fixed
NDA-24296
6.
MODULE
SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS
MBR0-3
3 2 1 0
ON
MBR4-7
3 2 1 0
ON
MBS0-3 PIM
3 2 1 0
ON
MBS4-7
3 2 1 0
SW0
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
SW1
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk
PA-8RSTM
1. General Function This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card that transmits and sends selective signals (DP signals, PB signals, MF signals).
LC
Station
ATI ATT RST TSW
COT
C.O. Line
TLT
Tie Line
Figure 3-117 Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations for this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown below.
SW10
SW11 OPE MB
BLS4 ~ BLS7
MBS4
BLR7 BLR4 ~
MBR7 SW03 MBR4

BLS0 ~ BLS3
MBS3 MBS0
BLR0 ~ BLR3
~
MBR0
MBS7
SW04
SW02
Figure 3-118 Face Layout of PA-8RSTM (8RST)
NDA-24296
MBR3
SW01
4.
LAMP NAME OPE BLR0 BLR7 BLS0
COLOR Green Red Flash OFF Red Flash OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.
BLS7
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
STANDARD SETTING
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING Circuit card Make-busy.
Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1 MBR0~3 (SW01) 2
4 MBR4~7 (SW03)
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME MBR4~7 (SW03)
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.
Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.
1 MBS0~3 (SW02) 2
5 MBS4~7 (SW04) 6
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE
1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF
-21 dBm0 -23 dBm0 -25 dBm0 -27 dBm0 -29 dBm0 (standard setting) -31 dBm0 -33 dBm0 -35 dBm0
ON SW10 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON

SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE SW10-4 SW10-5 SW10-6 MFR THRESHOLD VALUE
ON OFF ON OFF ON
-17 dBm0 -19 dBm0 -21 dBm0 -23 dBm0 (standard setting) -25 dBm0 -27 dBm0 -29 dBm0 -31 dBm0
6 OFF
OFF ON OFF
7 8
OFF ON
Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF). Fixed.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING MFR Receive Specification; AT&T MFR Receive Specification; ITU-T No. 5 PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.) PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)
2 OFF 3 SW11 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
Fixed Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of MFR. Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of PBR. Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of MFR. Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of PBR. DPR Receive Specification; General Spec. DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec. No setting (Fixed to OFF) Fixed
6 7 8
NDA-24296
6.
MODULE
SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS
MBR0-3 (SW01)
3 2 1 0
ON
MBR4-7 (SW03)
3 2 1 0
ON
MBS0-3 (SW02) PIM
3 2 1 0
ON
MBS4-7 (SW04)
3 2 1 0
SW10
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
SW11
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk
PA-8RSTY
1. General Function The PA-8RSTY circuit card is equipped with eight circuits of Registers and Senders. More specifically, this card contains Dial Pulse Register (DPR), Push Button Receiver (PBR) for receiving digits from extensions and/or the associated incoming trunks and Dial Pulse Sender (DPS), PB Signal Sender (PBS) for sending digits to a distant switching system. In addition, this card has Register Sender function, by which interdigit pause can be changed and PB signals may be converted to DP signals and vice versa without intervention of the CPU. The card can be used for caller ID service.
Note:
The PA-8RSTY card requires Series 7400 or later software.
This figure shows Register Sender function as an example.

PA-8RSTY PBR PBS DPR DPS OFF HOOK (LC for Calling Number Delivery) DP Signal LC DP Telephone Caller ID signals I/O Local Bus CPU GT PBR: Push Button Receiver PBS: PB Signal Sender DPR: Dial Pulse Register DPS: Dial Pulse Sender INT TSW INT PB line OGT PB Signal NETWORK
Figure 3-119 Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-8RSTY (RST) card can be mounted any universal slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-120.
3.
Note:
Layout of Lamps and switches differ from other RST cards.

00 01 02 03 04
PZ-M565 (ISAGTA) PZ-ME44 (MEM) PZ-PC22 (LANI) PZ-PC22 (LANI) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PH-M22 (MMC) PWRSW0 (PH-PW14) PH-DK10 (DSPC) PWRSW1 (PH-PW14) HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES)
PH-PC43 (EMA)
CMP
PZ-M565 (ISAGTA)
PZ-ME44 (MEM)
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PZ-PC22 (LANI)
PZ-PC22 (LANI)
FANU
DUMMY
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 HSW01 (PU-SW01) TSW00 (PU-SW00-A) TSW01 (PU-SW00-A) TSW02 (PU-SW00-A) TSW03 (PU-SW00-A) PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) IOGT0 (PH-GT10) IOGT1 (PH-GT10) PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) TSW10 (PU-SW00-A) TSW11 (PU-SW00-A) TSW12 (PU-SW00-A) TSW13 (PU-SW00-A) HSW10 (PU-SW01) HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES)
ISWM
00 01 02 03 04
PZ-PC23 (LANI) PZ-PC23 (LANI) PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
PH-PC43 (EMA) PH-IO24 (IOC) PH-IO24 (IOC) Note
SP
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)
Figure 3-120 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (8RST) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 425 Revision 1.0
PZ-PC23 (LANI)
PZ-PC19 (LANI)
PZ-PC23 (LANI)
4.
LAMP NAME OPE BLR0 BLR7
COLOR Green Green Flash OFF Green Flash OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
BLS0 BLS7
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME MB (SW00) SW01 (MBR0-7)
SWITC SETTING H NO. UP DOWN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit
SW02 (MBS0-7)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NDA-24296
SWITCH
SW10
1234
FUNCTION
SWITCH SETTING
MEANING
DTMF Signal Receiver Threshold Value [Standard Setting]

1234 ON OFF
Selection of PBR Threshold Value SW10- SW10- SW10DTMF Threshold Value 1 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF -21.0 dBm0 -23.0 dBm0 -25.0 dBm0 -27.0 dBm0 -29.0 dBm0 -31.0 dBm0 -33.0 dBm0 -35.0 dBm0
4 SW11
1234
OFF MFR Signal Receiver Threshold Value
Fixed to OFF
[Standard Setting]
1234 ON OFF
Selection of MFR Threshold Value SW11- SW11- SW111 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF MFR Threshold Value -17.0 dBm0 -19.0 dBm0 -21.0 dBm0 -23.0 dBm0 -25.0 dBm0 -27.0 dBm0 -29.0 dBm0 -31.0 dBm0
OFF
Fixed to OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH
FUNCTION
Designation of MFR Specification 1
SWITCH SETTING
1234
MEANING
AT & T specification
1234
DTMF Signal Cut-off Guard Timer 2 SW12

1234 1234
ITU-T No. 5 specification
1234
SHORT (less than 10 ms)
LONG (less than 20 ms)
[Standard Setting] Register Selection (MFR/PBR) 3

1234
1234
REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as MFR.
Register Selection (MFR/PBR) 4

1234
REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as PBR.
1234
REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as MFR.
REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as PBR.
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW13
SWITCH SETTING NO. ON 1 OFF 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING MF Transmission Level:-9dBm MF Transmission Level:-5dBm
Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF
SW14
1 2 3 4
SW15
1 2 3 4
SW16
1 2 3 4
SW17
1 2 3 4
NDA-24296
6.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS Circuit card make busy cancel Standard Setting : Down
MODULE PIM
SW00 (MB)
ON
ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SW01 (MBR0-7)
ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON
SW02 (MBS0-7)
1234
SW10
ON
1234
SW11
NDA-24296
PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk SWITCH NAME
MODULE PIM
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE
ON 1234
REMARKS
SW12
ON
1234
SW13
ON
1234
SW14
ON
1234
SW15
ON
1234
SW16
ON
1234
SW17
NDA-24296
PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
1. General Function The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable. This card has also the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the PA-SDTB card.
Fusion Link with FCCH
Fusion
Node-A
FCH
SDTA
Node-B Fiber Optic Cable Connection Link (Data Link) + Connection Trunk (Speech Path) Fiber Optic Cable For Dual Configuration
SDTA
FCH
S D T B
SDTA
S D T B
SDTA
Internal LAN
Internal LAN
Fusion Link without FCCH

Fusion
Node-A
SDTA
Node-B Fiber Optic Cable Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA
S D T B
SDTA
S D T B
SDTA
Fiber Optic Cable For Dual Configuration
Internal LAN
Trunk * ) SDT: SDH/SONET DigitalHandler FCH: Fusion Call Control

Figure 3-121 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 433 Revision 1.0
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in a universal slot next to (either left or right side of) PA-SDTB. When this card is provided in a dual configuration, mount this card on both sides of PA-SDTB.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
Mounting conditions are shown below. Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB). This card is connected to the PA-SDTB card using the following front cables. For single configuration: For dual configuration: SDT CABLEB <S> SDT CABLEA <D>
Fiber optic cables are connected to this card. Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW.
NDA-24296
Example:
When the PA-SDTA card is mounted in the 1-IMG system In Figure 3-122, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/PIM3 is not actually mounted.
PIM3 (Not actually mounted)
( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

I/O PCM
I/O
PH-PC30 (MUX)
PCM
PIM1
PA-SDTA (SDTA)
PA-SDTB (SDTB)
MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX MUX1B
MUX
PH-SW10 (TSW)
PIM0
MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
PH-SW10 (TSW)
PH-PC30 (MUX) MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
LPM
Figure 3-122 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout for lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-123.
OPE ACT MB
PALM OPT SYNC LPB
P-SW
I/O SW11 SW12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PCM
SC
Figure 3-123 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE PALM OPT SYNC LPB ACT
COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Green Green Off
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating normally. Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state. Lights when the OBP in this circuit card is abnormal. Lights when the optical input signals are cut off. Lights when receiving 52 Mbps clock comes off synchronization. Lights when Loop-back is designated. Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
.
SWITCH NAME MB 1 2 3 4 5 SW11 6 7 8 SW12 1-8 1 2 3 4 SWITCH NO. SETTING UP DOWN OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy Circuit card Make-busy cancel Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Not used PAD function is effective. PAD function is not effective. Setting of A-law Setting of -law OPT#0 Act (This card is used for System 0) OPT#1 Act (This card is used for System 1) Not used Designation of OLLPB (OPT Local Loop-back) Designation of OLLPB cancel Designation of ORLPB (OPT Remote Loop-back) Designation of ORLPB cancel. Not used Make-busy request Make-busy request cancel MEANING
P-SW
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Cable Connection
PA-SDTA
PA-SDTB
Fiber optic cable SDT CABLEB <S> Note1
Note 1: When the PA-SDTA card is provided in a dual configuration, SDT CABLEA (D) is used. Figure 3-124 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB
NDA-24296
When the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card is mounted in the 1-IMG system As shown in Figure 3-125, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/ PIM3 is not actually mounted.

I/O PCM
I/O
PH-PC30 (MUX)
PCM
PIM1
PA-SDTA (SDTA)
PA-SDTB (SDTB)
MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX MUX1B
MUX
PH-SW10 (TSW)
PIM0 Note MT24 TSW CA-140
MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
PH-SW10 (TSW)
PH-PC30 (MUX) MUX3 MUX2 MUX1
LPM
Note:
When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in PIM0, MT24 TSW CA-90 is used.
Figure 3-125 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System
NDA-24296
When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system (a) When to use the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system, the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable is used for connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. The type of cable varies depending on the mounting location of the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card(s).
Table 3-6 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable IMG0 IMG1 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D IMG2 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F IMG3 34PH MT24 TSW CA-J 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H
PIM3 PIM2 PIM1 PIM0
34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F
NDA-24296
(b) Relationship between the cable connection and the time slot Trunk data for SDT is assigned to an odd-number Module Group. The module group is determined by the connection of the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable as shown in the table below.
Table 3-7 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot MODULE GROUP Assigned for SDT TIME SLOTS Assigned for SDT PIM2 of IMG0 MG01 PIM3 of IMG0 PIM2 of IMG1 MG03 PIM3 of IMG1 PIM2 of IMG2 MG05 PIM3 of IMG2 PIM2 of IMG3 MG07 PIM3 of IMG3 CABLE CONNECTIONS FROM (Connectors on PA-SDTB) MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B TO (Connectors on BWB of TSWM) MUX002 MUX102 MUX003 MUX103 MUX012 MUX112 MUX013 MUX113 MUX022 MUX122 MUX023 MUX123 MUX032 MUX132 MUX033 MUX133 REMARKS
In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG0 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG1 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG2 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required.
Note 1: MUX1x on PA-SDTB and MUX1xx on BWB of TSWM are used when the system is a dual configuration. Note 2: When half of the time slots are used in a module group, time slots for PIM2 must be used. However, the
remaining time slots (for PIM3) cannot be used for other circuit cards.
NDA-24296
Example:
When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards are mounted in PIM3 of IMG0, and MG07 (PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3) is assigned for the SDT interface, the type of cable and connector locations are as shown in the following figure. The mounting location of PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB circuit card has no relationship to the time slots assigned for the SDT interface so the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards can be mounted in any PIM.
PA-SDTB
PIM3
MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B
PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 LPM IMG0 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H (Refer to Table 3-3.)
PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 TSWM IMG1
Time slots assigned for SDT (MG07). PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3 are not actually mounted.
To MUX133 To MUX033 To MUX132 To MUX032
BWB of TSWM
Connect the cables according to the time slots assigned for SDT. (Refer to Table 3-8 and Figure 3-133.)
Figure 3-126 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System
NDA-24296
MUXxxx Connectors for SDT
MUX133 MUX132
Figure 3-127 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT
MUX123 MUX122
MUX113 MUX112
MUX103 MUX102
MUX033 MUX032
MUX023 MUX022
MUX013 MUX012
MUX003 MUX002
NDA-24296
(c) Length of Fiber Optic Cable The maximum length of the fiber optic cable is approximately 15 kilometers (9.3 miles). Figure 3128 shows the level diagram of the fiber optic interface.
Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)
0.00
-5.00
Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : -8.00 dBm

-10.00
-15.00
-20.00
: Best Case : Worst Case : Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : Minimum Receiver Sensitivity
-25.00
-30.00
Minimum Receiver Sensitivity : -31.00 dBm

-35.00 0.00 2.00 1.20 4.00 2.40 6.00 3.70 8.00 4.40 10.00 6.20 12.00 14.00 7.40 8.60 16.00 18.00 9.90 11.00 20.00 (km) 12.00 (miles)
Cable Length
Figure 3-128 Level Diagram
Level margin in the case of 15 kilometers (9.3 miles) is as shown in the following table.
Table 3-8 Level Margin CONDITION Worst case Best case Note: LEVEL MARGIN 4.0 dB 11.0 dB
Maximum cable length varies depending on the type of cable and the number of connection points.
NDA-24296
Accommodation for the LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-129.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 POUT B 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 POUT B 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 POUT A 22 23 24 25
Accommodated in 1 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 POUT B 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 POUT A 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
POUT A
Note: The output of POUT A/B is 1,544 MHz.

LT Connector Slot No. LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME MB
REMARKS
SW11
1 234 5 67 8
ON
SW12
1 234 5 67 8
ON
ON 1 234
P-SW
NDA-24296
PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
PA-SDTB
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
1. General Function The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable. This card also has the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the PA-SDTA card.
Fusion Link with FCCH
Fusion
Node-A
FCH
SDTA
Node-B Fiber Optic Cable Connection Link (Data Link) + Connection Trunk (Speech Path) Fiber Optic Cable For Dual Configuration
SDTA
FCH
S D T B
SDTA
S D T B
SDTA
Internal LAN
Internal LAN
Fusion Link without FCCH

Fusion
Node-A
SDTA
Node-B Fiber Optic Cable Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA
S D T B
SDTA
S D T B
SDTA
Fiber Optic Cable For Dual Configuration
Internal LAN
Trunk * ) SDT: SDH/SONET DigitalHandler FCH: Fusion Call Control

Figure 3-130 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System CHAPTER 3 Page 448 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in any universal slots.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
Mounting conditions are shown below. Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB). This card is connected to the PA-SDTA card using the following front cables. For single configuration: For dual configuration: SDT CABLEB <S> SDT CABLEA <D>
This card is connected to the TSW card. Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW.
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in the figure in Figure 3-131.
OPE MB
2MALA 2MALB 32MALA 32MALB ACT0 ACT1 SYC0A SYC1A SYC0B SYC1B
PCM I/O MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B
Figure 3-131 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE
COLOR Green Red
STATE Remains lit when this circuit card is in operation. Remains lit when this circuit card is in non-operation. Lights when 2 M clock and FH from A-side MUX is abnormal. Lights when 2 M clock and FH from B-side MUX is abnormal. Lights when 32 M clock from A-side MUX is abnormal. Lights when 32 M clock from B-side MUX is abnormal. Remains lit when MUX#0 is operating normally. Remains off when MUX#0 is in stand-by state. Remains lit when MUX#1 is operating normally. Remains off when MUX#1 is in stand-by state. Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side. Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side. Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side. Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side. Goes off when the synchronization is not established.
2MALA 2MALB 32MALA 32MALB ACT0
Red Red Red Red Green Off Green
ACT1 Off Green SYC0A Off Green SYC1A Off Green SYC0B Off Green SYC1B Off Note:
A-side MUX means the card located in UNIT0/1 and B-side MUX means the card located in UNIT2/3.
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below:
SWITCH NAME MB
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy
MEANING
6.
External Interface Refer to the PA-SDTA circuit card.
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON
SWITCH NAME MB
NDA-24296
PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler
PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler
1. General Function Equipped with two circuits of Common Channel Handlers (CCHs), the PA-2CCH A circuit card provides two signaling links for a digital/analog Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system, which can be selected by key settings on this card. If a digital CCIS system, this card is connected to a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) card with a flat cable to exchange common channel signals as illustrated below. To support an analog CCIS system, this card also has an RS-232c interface for Modem(s).
Digital CCIS
Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)
CCH INT SW INT
Flat Cable 2-wire DTI 2-wire CCIS NETWORK
I/O Local Bus
Clock Extraction (For a PLO-SECONDARY switch)
CPU
System Clock
PLO
Analog CCIS (with MODEM) Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)
CCH INT SW INT MODEM
Analog Tie Line CLK TLT
CCIS NETWORK
I/O Local Bus
CPU
: Common Channel Signaling Link : Speech Path (PCM Signal) : Clock Signal
Figure 3-132 Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 453 Revision 1.0
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below. The DTI and CCH card, however, cannot coexist in the same Highway Block.
Mounting Module
PIM
The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in the following universal slots shown below. Note that this card cannot be mounted in slot 04.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
When this card is mounted in slot No.4, the LENS data for the first circuit of the CCH card must be assigned as 000 000, which is rejected by the ATRK command.
Note
NDA-24296
3.
SW14 OPE SW13 N-OPE MB DOPE0 DOPE1 SW11 SW01
SW12 SW10
SW02
TRK To "CN2" connector on CCT/DTI DCH/CCH To "TRK" connector on other DCH/CCH
Figure 3-133 Face Layout of PA-2CCHA (CCH)
4.
LAMP NAME
OPE N-OPE DOPE0 DOPE1
COLOR
Green Red Red Flash
STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the common channel signalling link is set up. Flashes when CCH is started up.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME
MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
ON OFF
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel No. 0 Circuit make busy request No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel No. 1 Circuit make busy request No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel Not used Not used Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed. Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed. Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed. Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed. Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed. Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed. Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed. Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.0 CIRCUIT
SW01 0
ON OFF ON 1 OFF 2 3 OFF OFF ON 0 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF
SW02
SW10 1
SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 TRANSFER SPEED
64 32 16 8 64 32 16 8
kbps kbps (Forward) kbps (Forward) kbps (Forward) kbps kbps (Backward) kbps (Backward) kbps (Backward)
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 4
SETTING ON OFF
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.1 CIRCUIT
SW10-5
SW10-6
SW10-7
TRANSFER SPEED
SW10
64 32 16 8 64 32 16 8
kbps kbps (Forward) kbps (Forward) kbps (Forward) kbps kbps (Backward) kbps (Backward) kbps (Backward)
ON 8 OFF SW11 (MODE0) SW12 (MODE1) Note: 0 0
Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit. Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit.
Standard setting Standard setting
When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, SW10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON. When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW13 (for No. 0 Circuit) SW14 (for No. 1 Circuit)
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
1
SW13-1/ SW14-1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT SW13-2/ SW14-2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON SW13-3/ SW14-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON SW13-4/ SW14-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON SW13-5/ SW14-5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON TIME SLOT NO. CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH28 CH29 CH30 CH31
ON 6 OFF
Mode setting; No. 7 PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method) Mode setting; No. 7 CCIS
SETTING OF SPEED OF MODE
SW13-7/ SW14-7 OFF OFF
SW13-8/ SW14-8 OFF ON OFF ON
SPEED 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Inhibit
ON ON
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface In analog CCIS, necessary leads for Modems appear on LT connectors as follows. See also Connecting Route Diagram for Digital/Analog CCIS.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 SCKB 0 TDB 0 RDB 0 SCKB 1 TDB 1 RDB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8 SCKA 0 TDA 0 RDA 0 SCKA 1 TDA 1 RDA 1
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 SG 0 27 RT 0 28 RS 0 29 30 SG 1 31 32 RT 1 33 RS 1 34 SCKB 0 35 TDB 0 36 RDB 0 37 38 SCKB 1 39 TDB 1 40 RDB 1 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RD 0 ER 0 ST2 0 SD 0 RD 1 ER 1 ST2 1 SD 1 SCKA 0 TDA 0 RDA 0 SCKA 1 TDA 1 RDA 1
SG 0 RT 0 RS 0 SG 1 RT 1 RS 1
RD 0 ER 0 ST2 0 SD 0 RD 1 ER 1 ST2 1 SD 1
LT2
LT4
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10HW11
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 SG 0 35 36 RT 0 37 RS 0 38 39 SG 1 40 RT 1 41 RS 1 42 SCKB 0 43 TDB 0 44 RDB 0 45 46 SCKB 1 47 TDB 1 48 RDB 1 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3
RD 0 ER 0 ST2 0 SD 0 RD 1 ER 1 ST2 1 SD 1 SCKA 0 TDA 0 RDA 0 SCKA 1 TDA 1 RDA 1
LT0
LT1
LT2
LT4
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Digital CCIS
MDF PBX TA DTI OUT TB RA IN RB POUTA POUTB CCH To PLO TA TB RA RB PCM CARRIER EQUIPMENT
CCH
CCH
CCH
DTI
TRK CN2
DCH/ CCH
CCH
Note DTI
FRONT VIEW
Note: A maximum of 7CCH cards can be connected to a DTI card. CCH Multiple Connection
TRK
DCH/ CCH
TRK
DCH/ CCH
Figure 3-135 Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS)
TRK
DCH/ CCH
TRK CN2
DCH/ CCH
NDA-24296
Analog CCIS (with MODEM)

15-m (50-foot) cable limit PBX MDF RD CCH SG ER RT ST2 RS SD SG ER RT ST2 RS SD <Available MODEM> synchronous 2400, 4800, 9600 bps 4-wire Full Duplex RD MODEM
Figure 3-136 Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS)
NDA-24296
7.
Switch Setting Sheet SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
MODULE PIM
SW01
3 2 1 0 ON
SW01-2 and 3: Not used
SW02
3 2 1 0 ON ON 12345678
SW10
SW11
Standard Setting
SW12
Standard Setting
ON
12345678
SW13
ON
12345678
SW14
MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk
PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk
1. General Function The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at 1.5 M bit/s. Being equipped with a Common Channel Handler (CCH), which can be allocated to a desired channel among the existing 24 channels by key setting and programming, this card can be used as an interface for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system. A built-in resonance circuit can be used for the purpose of extracting clock signals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key setting and programming.
Common Channel Signaling Link Built-in Common Channel Handler (x1)
INT
TSW
INT
CCH
T R
CCIS NETWORK
24CCT 1.544 MHz Clock Extraction (For PLO-secondary switch)
I/O Local Bus System Clock CPU
PLO
: Common Channel Signaling Link : Speech Path (PCM Signal) : Clock Signal
Figure 3-137 Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) card can be mounted in the following universal slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
This card is mounted in the following shaded slots.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
This card cannot be mounted in Slot 05.
Note
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-138. Note that there are two types of PA-24 CCTA cards which differ in their face layouts.
SW6G SW4D SW5D SW6C SW11B SW39 SW13B

3 2 1 0
OPE N-OPE MB
PCM FRM BER RMT AIS DOPE LYR LB
MODE SW58 SW138 BL23
SW25
BL00 CN2 To "TRK" Connector on CCH/DCH
OPE N-OPE SW18 SW17 SW00 MB

PCM FRM BER RMT AIS DOPE LYR LB 3 2 1 0
SW01
SW02 SW19 BL23
SW13 SW12 SW11 BL00 SW10 CN2 To "TRK" Connector on CCH/DCH
SW15
SW14
Figure 3-138 Face Layout of PA-24CCTA (24CCT)
NDA-24296
4.
Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9 PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE PCM FRM BER RMT AIS D-OPE LYR LB COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Red Yellow Green Green Green Green BL00 Flash OFF BL23 STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when an input signal is down (PCM LOSS). Lights when a frame alignment loss is detected. Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multi frame and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe. Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication. Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS). Remains lit while Common Channel Handler (CCH) block is active. Remains lit while CCIS signal link is set up. Remains lit while the CCIS signal is being looped back. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses) or corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM) Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP
STANDARD SETTING
SW00/MB DOWN ON 0 OFF ON 1 OFF SW01/13B ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF

SW01/SW13B 0 3 Internal Loopback CCH Control MBR CCH Loopback
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
SW01/SW13B 1 2 External Payload All Circuit Loopback Loopback MBR
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
Note:
For more information on loopback, see below.
As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card.
Payload Loopback External Loopback (Line Loopback)
PA-24CCTA TSW Interface Line Interface R NETWORK T Speech Path Control Block
Framer
Figure 3-139 Available Locations for Loopback Testing
Switch
Internal Loopback
PAD
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW02/ MODE
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Transmission Guard Timer Setting (sec.)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
4 (sec.) 5 (sec.) 6 (sec.) 7 (sec.) 8 (sec.) 9 (sec.) 10 (sec.) 11 (sec.) 12 (sec.) 13 (sec.) 14 (sec.) 15 (sec.) 16 (sec.) 17 (sec.) 18 (sec.) 19 (sec.) Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Negative
SW10/4D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Positive Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Negative Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Positive RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled Data Link Control: MOS Data Link Control: BOS Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe Coding Type: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) Coding Type: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution) Fixed to ON. When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for North America specification.
NDA-24296
PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk SWITCH NAME SW11/39 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW12/58 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF
SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance (feet)
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON
STANDARD SETTING PAD Control

SW11/39-1
MEANING
SW11/39-2
PAD Control
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
Bothway Receive only (Send 0dB) Send only (Receive 0dB) Fixed to ARTD command
Data PAD Control

SW11/39-3 SW11/39-4 Data PAD Value
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
64 Kbps 56 Kbps 48 Kbps 64 Kbps INV
T Signal Control
SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
ABCD ABAB Bit Steal Inhibited AAAA
R Signal Control
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
ON
Equalizer Setting
ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON Other Combinations 0 ~ 40 m 40 ~ 80 m 80 ~ 120 m 120 ~ 160 m 160 ~ 200 m Impossible
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SW12/58
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
ON
STANDARD SETTING
PAD Pattern Selection
MEANING
4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW13/6C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW14/5D 1 OFF 2 ON OFF ON 3 OFF 4 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Netfusing : Not used Netfusing : Used Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.) Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.) LAYER2 Signal Logic: Positive LAYER2 Signal Logic: Negative In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is: Not to be notified In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is: To be notified Zero Suppress: Not to be suppressed Zero Suppress: To be suppressed Fixed to all ON (Not used) Note:
SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6 PAD Pattern
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF Other Combinations
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) Impossible
When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.
Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.

SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 MODE
ON ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
Alarm is not sent out All 1 RMT Alarm
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SW15/25
SWITCH NO.
1 2
SETTING
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
Impedance Setting: 100 Impedance Setting: 110
MEANING
Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Ground Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Open Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Ground Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Open Idle Code Sending: To be sent out Idle Code Sending: Not to be sent out Common Channel Signal Transfer Speed Selection
SW17/6G-1 SW17/6G-2 SW17/6G-3 PAD Pattern
4 SW17/6G 1
OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
64 Kbps 32 Kbps (Forward) 16 Kbps (Forward) 8 Kbps (Forward) 64 Kbps 32 Kbps (Backward) 16 Kbps (Backward) 8 Kbps (Backward)
Signal Channel Designation

Signal Channel
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
4
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
5
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
SW17/6G 6
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
7
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
8
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SW18/11B
SWITCH NO.
1 2 3 4
SETTING
ON ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
Fixed to all ON ON ON ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF

6
Selection of CCH: Built-in CCH Selection of CCH: External CCH (To be used together with PA-2CCHA card) Selection of Common Channel Signal Speed
SW18/11B 7 8 Transfer Speed
ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW19/138 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 ON Note: ON
OFF ON ON 56Kbps ON OFF ON As per SW17/6G-1 - 3 ON ON OFF 48Kbps Other Combinations Impossible
COP Alarm: Inhibited COP Alarm: Allowed Operating Mode Setting

SW19/138 2 3 Operating Mode
OFF OFF When No.7 CCIS is set ON OFF When No.7 CCIS PCR is set Note Other Not used Combinations
PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method)
Fixed to ON
NDA-24296
Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24CCTA As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - PAD. The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.
Table 3-10 Digital PAD Setting Table PAD Pattern (selected by key setting) PAD DATA PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 ARTD
SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE
A Loss (Bothway)
SEND RECIEVE
A Loss (Receive)
SEND RECIEVE
A Loss (Bothway)
SEND RECIEVE
A Loss (Receive)
SEND RECIEVE
1 2 3 4 5 7
2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]
2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]
-3 [dB]
Note
3 [dB] 3 [dB] 6 [dB] 9 [dB]
0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]
0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]
0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]
0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB]
0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]
0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]
0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]
0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB]
3 [dB] 0 [dB] 3 [dB]
Key settings of SW11/39-3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD Patterns) 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through
Note:
- represents GAIN in this table.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
Accommodated in 1 LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector 26 E 27 28 RB 29 30 POUTB 31 32 33 TB 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E RA POUTA TA
E RB POUTB TB
E RA POUTA TA
E RB POUTB TB
E RA POUTA TA
LT1
LT2
LT4
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10HW11
NDA-24296
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card is as follows.
MDF PBX Installation Cable 24CCT OUT TA TB RA IN RB POUTA POUTB PLO DIU1A DIU1B Note 2 1.5 MHz Clock Extraction Note 1 TA TB RA RB CCIS NETWORK
Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side. Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about these
leads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.

NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH NAME SW00/MB
MODULE PIM
SLOT NO.
SWITCH SHAPE DOWN
REMARKS Circuit card make busy cancel
SW01/13B
3 2 1 0 ON
SW02 (MODE)
Standard Setting
24-multiframe CCT Standard

ON ON 12345678
12345678
SW10/4D 12-multiframe CCT Standard

ON 12345678
ON
12345678
SW11/39
ON
12345678
SW12/58
ON
12345678
SW13/6C
Fixed to all ON.
NDA-24296
MODULE PIM
SLOT NO.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS 24-multiframe CCT Standard

ON 1234
ON
1234
SW14/5D 12-multiframe CCT Standard

ON 1234
ON
SW15/25
1234
ON
12345678
SW17/6G
ON
12345678
SW18/11B
ON
1234
SW19/138
NDA-24296
PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler
PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler
1. General Function This circuit card controls D channels of ISDN Line. This circuit card provides 2-circuit D-channel Handler (DCH).
TSW ISDN Terminal ILC 24DTI DSU
DCH Dterm DLC
LC
PLO
Figure 3-142 Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Module PIM
06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
00
01
02
03
04
05
Note:
Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. This circuit card must be mounted in a slot on the left side of the slot in which DTI card is mounted. This circuit card cannot be mounted in Slot 04 of PIM0.
NDA-24296
3.
SW14 SW13 OPE N-OPE MB SW12 SW10 SW11 SW01

DOPE0 DOPE1
SW02
Figure 3-143 Face Layout of PA-2DCHA (2DCH)
4.
LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE DOPE0 DOPE1
COLOR Green Red Green Flash
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the common channel signaling link is set up. Flashes when DCH is started up.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP
STANDARD SETTING
MB
DOWN ON 0 OFF ON
Circuit card make busy cancel No. 0 Circuit make busy request No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel No. 1 Circuit make busy request No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel Not used Not used Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed. Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed. Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed. Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed. Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed. Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed. Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed. Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.
SW01
1 2 3 0
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
1 SW02 2
OFF ON OFF ON OFF
NDA-24296

SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
1
SW10-1
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/ INSERT IN NO. 0 CIRCUIT SW10-2 SW10-3 TRANSFER SPEED
64 kbps 32 kbps (Forward) 16 kbps (Forward) 8 kbps (Forward) 64 kbps 32 kbps (Backward) 16 kbps (Backward) 8 kbps (Backward)
4 SW10 5
ON OFF
Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit.

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/ INSERT IN NO. 1 CIRCUIT SW10-5 SW10-6 SW10-7 TRANSFER SPEED
64 kbps 32 kbps (Forward) 16 kbps (Forward) 8 kbps (Forward) 64 kbps 32 kbps (Backward) 16 kbps (Backward) 8 kbps (Backward)
8 SW11 (MODE0) SW12 (MODE1) Note:
ON OFF 1 5 1 5
Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit. Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit. AT & T Bell AT & T Communication AT & T Bell AT & T Communication
When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, 10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON. When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT
SW13-1/ SW13-2/ SW13-3 SW13-4/ SW13-5/ SW14-1 SW14-2 SW14-3 SW14-4 SW14-5
TIME SLOT NO.
3 SW13 (for No. 0 Circuit) SW14 (for No. 1 Circuit) 4
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH28 CH29 CH30 CH31
ON OFF
D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side D Channel Mode Selection; User Side
SETTING OF SPEED MODE
SW13-7/SW14-7
SW13-8/SW14-8
SPEED
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF ON OFF ON
2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Inhibit
NDA-24296
6.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT6 SCKB 0 TDB 0 RDB 0 SCKB 1 TDB 1 RDB 1 1 SCKA 0 2 TDA 0 3 RDA 0 4 5 SCKA 1 6 TDA 1 7 RDA 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 SG 0 RT 0 RS 0 SG 1 RT 1 RS 1 SCKB 0 TDB 0 RDB 0 SCKB 1 TDB 1 RDB 1 RD 0 1 2 ER 0 ST2 0 3 4 SD 0 RD 1 5 ER 1 6 ST2 1 7 SD 1 8 9 SCKA 0 10 TDA 0 11 RDA 0 12 13 SCKA 1 14 TDA 1 15 RDA 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
SG 0 RT 0 RS 0 SG 1 RT 1 RS 1
RD 0 ER 0 ST2 0 SD 0 RD 1 ER 1 ST2 1 SD 1
LT2
LT4
LT5
LT7
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RD 0 10 ER 0 11 ST2 0 12 SD 0 13 RD 1 14 ER 1 15 ST2 1 16 SD 1 17 SCKA 0 18 TDA 0 19 RDA 0 20 21 SCKA 1 22 TDA 1 23 RDA 1 24 25 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11
SG 0 RT 0 RS 0 SG 1 RT 1 RS 1 SCLB 0 TDB 0 RDB 0 SCLB 1 TDB 1 RDB 1
LT0
LT1
LT2
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
When modem is not used
MDF NEAX2400 IPX
DTI
DSU
DCH
Front Cable connection DCH DTI/CCT
TRK CN2
Front
Note:
For cross connections between DTI and D-channel common channel signalling line, refer to the explanations of 24DTI circuit card.
NDA-24296
When modem is used
MDF NEAX2400 IPX
DCH
RD SG ER RT ST2 RS SD
RD SG ER RT ST2 RS SD
MODEM
Cable length is maximum 15 meters (50 feet). The modem to be used is a synchronous modem of 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps, and the communication method is limited to 4-wire full duplex communications.
NDA-24296
7.

MODULE
SW01
3 2 1 0 ON
SW01-2, 3 : Not used
SW02
3 2 1 0 ON
SW10
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
PIM SW11
1 : AT & T Bell 5 : AT & T Communication
SW12
1 : AT & T Bell 5 : AT & T Communication
SW13
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
SW14
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
1. General Function This circuit card, which is for ISDN, is used in conjunction with PA-24DTR/PA-24PRTB-A to provide H11 terminal (1.536 Mbps) with D-channel signal. ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminal (64 Kbps), incidentally, cannot be connected to this circuit card.
TSW PRT
ILC
H11 Terminal/ Terminal Adapter PRT
ISDN NETWORK
PA-24DTR/ PA-24PRTB-A
Figure 3-146 Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-ILCG (ILC) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 B-ch B-ch B-ch B-ch B-ch B-ch
Mounting Condition
Mounting conditions for this circuit card are as follows: 1. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23. 2. Mount this circuit card so that its leads and the leads of any other analog line/trunk circuit card may not come out to the same LT cable. 3. This circuit card is not used in even-number module group (MG), unit (U)=0 and group (G)=0. 4. When registering this circuit card in the shaded slots, user must assign B-channels to odd-number group (G) and D-channel to even-number group(G). 5. Do not mount other line/trunk card in just right side of the slot where a PA-ILCG card is mounted.
D-ch
D-ch
D-ch
D-ch
D-ch
D-ch
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps and Switches The face layout of lamps and switches is shown in Figure 3-147.
SW06
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OPE N-OPE MB KEY
BL42 BL41 LYR4 PWR4
PKT MODE 0 SW01

1 2 3 4 1
SW04
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1
SW05
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MODE 1
Figure 3-147 Face Layout of PA-ILCG (ILC)
NDA-24296
4.
Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:
Table 3-11 PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE BL42 COLOR Green Red Green Flash (60IPM) OFF Green Flash (60IPM) OFF Green Flash (120IPM) OFF PWR4 PKT Red Green OFF STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights green when B2-channel is being accessed and in operation. The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state. The corresponding channel is idle. Lights green when B1-channel is being accessed and in operation. The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state. The corresponding channel is idle. Remains lit while Layer 2 of the corresponding channel is active. Flashes while Layer 1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is established. Layer 1 and/or Layer 2 have not been established. Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding circuit is activated; the corresponding line is short-circuited. Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation. Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.
BL41
LYR4
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make-busy
MEANING
Circuit card make-busy cancel
1 SW01 2 3 4 1 2 3 SW04 4 5 6 7 8
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Fixed to ON Fixed to ON Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Fixed to ON (Wiring Mode) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON)
PAD Value Selection
1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 SW05 OFF ON 4 OFF 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF ON OFF ON
SW05-1 SW05-2
Receiving Pad
Sending Pad
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF ON OFF ON
0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
0 dB 2 dB 5 dB 8 dB
Length of Call Reference Value Selection SW05-3 SW05-4 Length of Call Reference Value
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate ON Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate OFF Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate ON Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate
Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) D-channel Packet Service: Available D-channel Packet Service: Not available
Not used (Fixed to ON)
NDA-24296
PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 4 SW06 5 6 7 8 MODE 0 1~F 0~5 MODE 1 6 7~F Note: ON ON ON ON 0 STANDARD SETTING
SETTING ON ON ON ON
MEANING Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Data link mode for Layer 2: Point-to-Point (P-P) (Fixed to ON) Note Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Fixed to 0 Not used Not used
Fixed to 6 Not used
The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) used in this table have no relation to the actual wiring configuration.
NDA-24296
6.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 3, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 RB TB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 RA TA 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 7 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 6 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
RB TB
RA TA
RB TB
RA TA
LT2
LT4
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10HW11
NDA-24296
MDF PBX
ILC
RA RB TA TB
TA TB RA RB TA TB RA RB
Modular Rosette MJ-8SR ISDN Terminal
24DTR/ 24PRTB-A
RA RB TA TB
Modular Rosette MJ-8S H11 Terminal/ Terminal Adapter
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE
ON
REMARKS
MB
ON
SW01
1 2 3 4
ON
SW04
12345678
ON
SW05
12345678
ON
SW06
12345678
MODE 0
MODE 1
NDA-24296
PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit
PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-4ILCH is a line circuit card which accommodates ISDN Terminal via NT1. The main features of this circuit card are shown below: A maximum of four Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminals can be accommodated. This card and NT1 are connected using 2-wire U Interface. Sealing current (Maximum 15mA) can be supplied for keeping cables from rusting.
TSW PA-4ILCH NT1 TE I.430 ANSI T1.601
PLO
Figure 3-150 Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-4ILCH (4ILC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-151.
OPE NOPE MB
BL32 BL31 LYR3 BER3 BL22 BL21 LYR2 BER2 BL12 BL11 LYR1 BER1 BL02 BL01 LYR0 BER0
SW12
SW11 MBR SW20 LPB

L3 L2 L1 L0 L3 L2 L1 L0
SW10
MODE
MONITOR (Not used) SW21
Figure 3-151 Face Layout of PA-4ILCH (4ILC)
NDA-24296
4.
Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indication on this circuit card are shown below.
LAMP NAME OPE NOPE BLn2 n=0~3
COLOR Green Red Green Flashing Off Green
MEANING Lights when the card is in normal operation. Lights when the card is in make-busy state. Lights when B2 channel of line #n is communicating. Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM). During idle state. Lights when B1 channel of the line #n is communicating. Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM). During idle state. Lights when layer 2 link of the line #n is established. Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of S Reference Point (60 IPM). Note Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of U Reference Point (120 IPM). Note Synchronization is not established on either Layer 1 or Layer 2. Two or more CRC errors occur per second and the condition lasts for 10 seconds. One or no CRC error occurs per second.
BLn1 n=0~3
Flashing Off Green
LYRn n=0~3
Flashing
Off BERn n=0~3 Note: Red Off
Establishment of synchronization on U Reference Point may require 30 seconds or more.
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switches on this card have the following meanings.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN ON
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel Line 0 make busy request Line 0 make busy request cancel Line 1 make busy request Line 1 make busy request cancel Line 2 make busy request Line 2 make busy request cancel Line 3 make busy request Line 3 make busy request cancel Loop back is set on NT1 for line 0. Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 0. Loop back is set on NT1 for line 1. Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 1. Loop back is set on NT1 for line 2. Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 2. Loop back is set on NT1 for line 3. Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 3. Not used Fixed Not used Fixed D-channel Packet Service Available D-channel Packet Service Not Available Fixed Fixed
OFF ON
1 MBR 2
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
1 LPB 2
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF 0-2
MODE
3 4-F 1 2 ON ON OFF 3 4 ON ON
SW10
NDA-24296
PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 4 SW11 5 6 7 8 STANDARD SETTING
SETTING ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
SW1
MEANING Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Sealing Current is not supplied.

SW2
Sealing Current is supplied. PAD Control (TSW Side PAD Value) Note
SW3 TSW Side PAD Value
1~3
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
SW12
OFF ON
Not used PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-5dB PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-3dB PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB Not used PAD2=0dB, PAD1=5dB (Standard Setting) PAD2=0dB, PAD1=3dB PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB
4 5 6 7 8 Note:
ON ON ON ON ON
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed
PAD control is shown below.
PAD1 TSW Side PAD2 Line Side
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 0: Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 0: Point-to-Point (P-P) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 1: Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 1: Point-to-Point (P-P) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 2: Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 2 Point-to-Point (P-P) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 3: Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 3: Point-to-Point (P-P) On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis. On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated. On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis. On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated. On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis. On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated. On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis. On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.
1 OFF ON 2 SW20 Note 1 Note 2 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON SW21 Note 2 3 OFF ON 4 OFF 5 6 7 8 ON ON ON ON OFF ON
Note 1: The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) and Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) used in this table have no relation to the
actual wiring configuration.

Note 2: This switch must be set according to the specification of the ISDN terminal.
NDA-24296
6.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 B0 B1 B2 B3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 A0 A1 A2 A3 Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
B0 B1 B2 B3
A0 A1 A2 A3
B0 B1 B2 B3
A0 A1 A2 A3
LT2
LT4
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PWR
PWR
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-152 LT Connector Leads Accommodation CHAPTER 3 Page 506 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
MDF PIM
ILC
A B
A B
NT1
NDA-24296
7.

MODULE
ON
MB
UP: Circuit card make busy DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel
OFF
MBR
No. No. No. No.
3 2 1 0 ON
OFF
LPB
No. No. No. No.
3 2 1 0 ON
MODE PIM
ON
SW10
12 34
ON
SW11
12 34 567 8
ON
SW12
123 4 56 78
ON
SW20
1234
ON
SW21
1 234 56 78
NDA-24296
PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) circuit card provides an interface between the system and a maximum of eight ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminals, allowing the system to use eight ISDN BRIs, which are made up of two B channels at 64 kbps and one D channel at 16 kbps (2B+D 8), on the same bus. In addition, this card supports D channel packet function. For this feature, however, available channels are seven channels, ranging from No. 0 to No. 6.
SW PRT ILC (MAX. 8 circuits) PRT ILC (MAX. 8 terminals)
ISDN NETWORK
Figure 3-154 Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-8ILCE-A card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
The circuit card cannot be mounted in slot No. 04 of PIM0. This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0 (U=0) of even-number Module Group.
Note
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on the circuit card is shown in Figure 3-155.
SW02
SW03
SW06
CH #7
OPE N-OPE MB
BL72 LYR7 BL62 LYR6 BL52 LYR5 BL42 LYR4 BL32 LYR3 BL22 LYR2 BL12 LYR1 BL02 LYR0 BL71 PWR7 BL61 PWR6 BL51 PWR5 BL41 PWR4 BL31 PWR3 BL21 PWR2 BL11 PWR1 BL01 PWR0
CH #6
CH #5
CH #4 BL02 BL01 LYR0 PWR0 CH #2 CH #1
CH #3
CH #0
SW00
SW01
SW04 SW05
PKT MODE0 MODE1
Figure 3-155 Face Layout of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC)
NDA-24296
4.
Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on the circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP NAME
OPE N-OPE
COLOR
Green Red Green
DESCRIPTION
Remains lit while the circuit card is operating. Remains lit while the circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights green when B1 channel is being accessed and in operation. The corresponding channel is in make-busy state. The corresponding channel is idle. Lights green when B2 channel is being accessed and in operation. The corresponding channel is in make-busy state. The corresponding channel is idle. Remains lit while Layer2 of the corresponding channel is active. Note Flashes while Layer1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is established. Layer1 and/or Layer2 have not been established. Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding circuit is activated; the corresponding line is short-circuited. Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation. Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.
BL n1 (n=0-7)
Flash (60IPM) OFF Green
BL n2 (n=0-7)
Flash (60IPM) OFF Green
LYR n (n=0-7)
Flash (120IPM) OFF
PWR n (n=0-7) PKT
Red Green OFF
Note:
Depending on the type of the connected ISDN terminal, whose Layer2 is not always active, this lamp may flash when the terminal is idle and lights green at the time of call set-up.
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on the circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING
ON OFF 1 SW00 2 3 4 1 SW01 2 3 4 1 SW02 2 3 4 1 SW03 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SW04 Note 5 6 7 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
SWITCH
MB
MEANING
Make busy of the circuit card.
Normal setting
Fixed to all ON.
Fixed to all ON.
Fixed to all ON.
Fixed to all ON.
Circuit #0: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #0: Short Passive Connection Circuit #1: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #1: Short Passive Connection Circuit #2: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #2: Short Passive Connection Circuit #3: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #3: Short Passive Connection Circuit #4: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #4: Short Passive Connection Circuit #5: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #5: Short Passive Connection Circuit #6: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #6: Short Passive Connection Circuit #7: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #7: Short Passive Connection
NDA-24296
Note:
Set the SW04 to determine the 4-wire bus mode referring to the following.
ON Point-to-Point mode: In this mode one Terminal Equipment (TE) can be connected at the end of up to a maximum of 600 m of cable as shown below.
Modular Rossete (with terminating resistor (100)) max 600 m (in the case of 0.5 [mm])
ILC
TE
Extended Passive Bus mode: This mode is a point-to-multipoint mode, in which up to eight terminals can be connected. Note that the terminals must be connected within 50 m from the end of the bus cables as shown below.
ILC Modular Rossete TE max 50m max 400m (in the case of 0 .5 [mm]) TE Modular Rossete (with terminating resistor (100))
OFF Short Passive Bus mode: This mode is also a point-to-multipoint mode, in which a maximum of eight terminals can be connected anywhere on the bus. Note that the bus length is limited to 200 m in this case.
ILC Modular Rossete TE Terminals can be connected any location on the bus. max 200 m (in the case of 0.5 [mm]) TE Modular Rossete (with terminating resistor (100))
NDA-24296
SWITCH
SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING

ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF PAD Level Adjustment:
MEANING
SW1
SW2
RECEIVE (dB)
SEND (dB)
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF ON OFF ON
0 0 0 0
0 2 5 8
SW05
3 4 5 6 7
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Fixed to OFF. Fixed to OFF. Not used Not used Packet Access via D channel: In Service Packet Access via D channel: Out of Service
8 1
ON ON OFF ON
Fixed to ON. Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Multipoint
2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW06 Note 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF Note: OFF ON
Adjust each key according to the specification of each ISDN terminal.
NDA-24296
SWITCH
SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING 0
MEANING Fixed to 0.
MODE0
1 Not used F 0 Not used 5
MODE1
6 7
Fixed to 6.
Not used F
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 RB0 TB0 RB1 TB1 RB2 TB2 RB3 TB3 RB4 TB4 RB5 TB5 RB6 TB6 RB7 TB7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 RA0 TA0 RA1 TA1 RA2 TA2 RA3 TA3 RA4 TA4 RA5 TA5 RA6 TA6 RA7 TA7 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
RB0 TB0 RB1 TB1 RB2 TB2 RB3 TB3 RB4 TB4 RB5 TB5 RB6 TB6 RB7 TB7
RA0 TA0 RA1 TA1 RA2 TA2 RA3 TA3 RA4 TA4 RA5 TA5 RA6 TA6 RA7 TA7
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-157)
NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 RB4 TB4 RB5 TB5 RB6 TB6 RB7 TB7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA4 TA4 RA5 TA5 RA6 TA6 RA7 TA7
RB0 TB0 RB1 TB1 RB2 TB2 RB3 TB3
RA0 TA0 RA1 TA1 RA2 TA2 RA3 TA3
LT1
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Point-to-Point
MDF
ILC
RA RB TA TB
TA TB RA RB
Modular Rossete with terminating resistor (100)
TE
Point-to-Multipoint
MDF
ILC
RA RB TA TB
TA TB RA RB Modular Rossete Modular Rossete with terminating resistor (100)
TE
TE
TA TB RA RB
RA RB TA TA
RA RB TA TA
NDA-24296
7.
MODULE
SLOT NO.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
ON
MB
ON
1234
SW00
ON
1234
SW01
ON
1234
SW02
ON
1234
SW03 PIM
ON 12345678
SW04
ON
12345678
SW05
ON
12345678
SW06
MODE0
MODE1
NDA-24296
PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk
PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk
1. General Function The PA-4DATA (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features related to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant, Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works in one of the following three modes. 16-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card) 32-sec. mode (maximum 2 CHs/card) 60-sec. mode (maximum 1 CH/card)
A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set (See the Reference). In addition, this circuit card can be used as an external music source.
This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
We are sorry, the line is busy now. Please stay on the line for a while.
(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)
TSW INCOMING CALL COT DAT COT ATI INCOMING CALL CALLING PARTY PUBLIC NETWORK CALLING PARTY
ATTCON (Busy)
CPU
GT
Figure 3-158 Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-4DATA (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
SW5 SW7 (SW12)
WR OPE N-OPE (SW11) MB BL7 (G) BL4 (G) BL3 (R)

3 2 1 0
SW6
BL0 (R) MBRQ MRCS START JACK
(SW10) (SW9) (SW8)
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
Figure 3-159 Face Layout of PA-4DATA (DAT)
4.
LAMP OPE N-OPE BL4 BL7 BL0 BL3
COLOR Green Red Green Flash Red Flash
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a recording source. Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through No. 3 circuit). Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state or has not been assigned in the system.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy
SWITCH
SETTING UP
MEANING
MB (SW11) DOWN

SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT 1 2 3 4 TIMER (MODE)
1 SW1 (for No. 0 Circuit) SW2 (for No. 1 Circuit) SW3 (for No. 2 Circuit) SW4 (for No. 3 Circuit) 4 2
ON ON OFF
ON ON OFF
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF OFF
16-sec. mode 32-sec. mode 60-sec. mode
Note 1: 16-sec. mode = 4 recording circuits 3
32-sec. mode = 2 recording circuits 60-sec. mode = 1 recording circuit

Note 2: For each circuit, SW1 - SW4 must be set in
the same way (Two different modes cannot be mixed assigned.).
SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
SW5-1
SW5-2
RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF OFF
16-sec. Recording/Playback 32-sec. Recording/Playback 60-sec. Recording/Playback
SW5
Note 3: Set the Recording/Playback Timer in the same way as set
by SW1-SW4.
3 Note 4 4 OFF When using as announcement equipment only ON OFF ON
Compression Law: -law Compression Law: A-law When using as an external music-on-hold source
Note 4: Valid in the case of recording or playback from a telephone set.
NDA-24296
SWITCH
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Single playback by No. 0 Circuit Note 5 Multiple playback by No. 0 Circuit Single playback by No. 1 Circuit Note 5 Multiple playback by No. 1 Circuit Single playback by No. 2 Circuit Note 5 Multiple playback by No. 2 Circuit Single playback by No. 3 Circuit Note 5 Multiple playback by No. 3 Circuit
2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW6 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
Fixed Fixed Not used Recording from a telephone set Normal setting
Note 5: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback
(ON).
1 2 SW7 3 4 OFF OFF UP START (SW8) DOWN OFF OFF
Fixed Fixed Not used Not used Setting for recording start from a tape recorder or for playback start.
Normal setting
NDA-24296
SWITCH
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
E 0 1 2
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
Set to E while the circuit card is using as announcement equipment only. Designation of No. 0 Circuit. The timer is 16-sec. mode. Designation of No. 1 Circuit. The timer is 16-sec. mode. Designation of No. 2 Circuit. The timer is 16-sec. mode. Designation of No. 3 Circuit. The timer is 16-sec. mode. Designation of No. 0 and No. 1 Circuit. The timer is 32-sec. mode. Designation of No. 2 and No. 3 Circuit. The timer is 32-sec. mode. Designation of All Circuits. The timer is 60-sec. mode. Recording from a telephone set. No. 0 Circuit make busy request No. 0 Circuit is designated during a recording.
MRCS (SW9) Note 6
3 4 5 6 F ON 0 OFF ON 1
No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel No. 1 Circuit make busy request No. 1 Circuit is designated during a recording.
MBRQ (SW10) 2
OFF ON OFF ON 3 OFF
No. 3 Circuit make busy request cancel Recording from a tape recorder (WRITE mode) Normal setting
WR (SW12)
UP DOWN
Note 6: When this circuit card is using an external music-on-hold source, set 0, 4 or 6 by timer mode.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface When this circuit card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following leads (FM, E) appear from the LT connector.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 LT4 FM Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT6 LT7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
FM
FM
LT2
LT5
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
[Reference] How to Record a Message Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
Table 3-12 Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode) SWITCH SW1 SETTING
ON
DESCRIPTION
1234
Timer Value for Channel 0-3: 60 sec.

1234 1234 WR OPE N-OPE
SW4 Circuit Card Timer: 60 sec. A-law/-law: -law External Music Source/Announcement Equipment: Announcement Equipment Single/Repeated Playback: Repeated Playback
SW5
SW7
MB BL7
ON
SW5
1234
12 3456 78 BL0 SW6

3 2 1 0
MBRQ MRCS START
SW6
ON12345678
JACK 1234 1234 1234 1234 BATTERY PACK
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
MRCS
Channel Designation: 60 sec. mode
Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.
Front DAT Tape Recorder
Jack Earphone Jack (3.6 )
Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded. (To record a message in the 60 sec. mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)
Turn the WR key upwards. (The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder is connected to the circuit.)
Turn the START key upwards. (The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)
NDA-24296
Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel. - recording -
The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 ~ BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.) Return the START, WR key to the previous position.
How to Play Back the Recorded Message Playback from a telephone set Set the related switches on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card. Seize a specific channel by Individual Trunk Access. Hear the recorded message.
Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATA (DAT) card Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card. Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch. Turn the START key upwards. Hear the recorded message.
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE
ON 1234
MODULE
REMARKS
SW1
ON
1234
SW2
ON
1234
SW3
ON
1234
SW4
ON
1234
SW5
ON
12345678
SW6 PIM
ON 1234
SW7
START (SW8)
ON
MRCS (SW9)
ON
MBREQ (SW10)
3 2 1 0
WE (SW12) MB DOWN
ON
NDA-24296
PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk
PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk
1. General Function The PA-4DATB (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features related to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant, Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works in one of the following three modes. 64-sec. 128-sec. 240-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card) mode (maximum 2 CHs/card) mode (maximum 1 CH/card)
A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set. (See the Reference). In addition, this circuit card can be used as an external music source. This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
We are sorry, the line is busy now. Please stay on the line for a while.
(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)
TSW INCOMING CALL COT DAT COT ATI INCOMING CALL CALLING PARTY PUBLIC NETWORK CALLING PARTY
ATTCON (Busy)
CPU
GT
Figure 3-161 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-4DATB (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
WR
OPE N-OPE MB
SW5 SW3 SW6 SW1
BL7 BL0
SW7 SW2
3 2 1 0
MBRQ MRCS START JACK
SW4 JP0
Figure 3-162 Face Layout of PA-4DATB (DAT)
4.
LAMP OPE N-OPE BL4 BL7 BL0 BL3
COLOR Green Red Green Flash Red Flash
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a recording source. Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through No. 3 circuit) Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state or has not been assigned in the system.
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy
SWITCH MB
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel Make busy request on a channel basis (Channel Designation for Recording/Playback)
MBRQ 1-4
ON OFF
Make busy request cancel on a channel basis

Setting of Recording Mode
MRCS
0 1
SWITCH NO. Mode Channel
2 3 4 5 6 7 SW1 SW4 Each Switch corresponds to each channel of DAT: channel SW1: channel #0 SW2: channel #1 SW3: channel #2 SW4: channel #3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
64-sec. mode
128-sec. mode 240-sec. mode
0 1 2 3 0, 1 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3
SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT 1 2 3 4 TIMER (MODE)
ON ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON
ON OFF OFF ON
64-sec. mode 128-sec. mode 240-sec. mode Not available
NDA-24296
SWITCH
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME SW5-1 SW5-2 RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF OFF
64-sec. Recording/Playback 128-sec. Recording/Playback 240-sec. Recording/Playback
SW5
Note 1: Setting
of Recording/Playback Timer should correspond to that of SW1-SW4.
ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW6 5 OFF 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
Compression Law: -law Compression Law: A-law To be used as external hold tone source To be used as announcement equipment Single playback of No. 0 channel Note 3 Multiple playback of No. 0 channel Note 2 Single playback of No. 1 channel Note 3 Multiple playback of No. 1 channel Note 2 Single playback of No. 2 channel Note 3 Multiple playback of No. 2 channel Note 2 Single playback of No. 3 channel Note 3 Multiple playback of No.3 channel Note 2 RAM Test data-clear
RAM Test data-store Not used Not used Not used
Note 2: When this card is used as announcement equipment, SW6-1~ 6-4 should be set OFF. Note 3: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback (ON).
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW7
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING Activation of RAM Test
MEANING
Normal Setting Port Microprocessor is reset when MBR key is ON. Port Microprocessor is not reset when MBR key is ON. Not used Not used For Recording from the phone jack Normal setting When starting recording from the phone jack or playback. Normal setting
2 OFF 3 4 WR OFF OFF UP DOWN START UP DOWN
Table 3-13 Jumper Setting SWITCH JP0 SWITCH SHAPE SETTING LEFT RIGHT Compression Law: -law Compression Law: A-law DESCRIPTION
LEFT
RIGHT
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface When this card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following cable connection is required.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 LT2 E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 LT4 FM Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT6 LT7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
FM
FM
LT5
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
[Reference] HOW TO RECORD A MESSAGE Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
Table 3-14 SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>) SWITCH SW1 SETTING
ON
DESCRIPTION
1234
Timer Value for Channel 0-3 240 sec.
SW4 Circuit Card Timer: 240 sec. A-law/-law: -law External Music Source/Announcement Equipment: Announcement Equipment Single/Repeated Playback: Repeated Playback
1234 WR 1234 1234 OPE N-OPE MB 12 3456 78 SW5 1234 SW3 BL7
SW5
ON
1234
BL0 SW6 1234 SW1 1234

3 2 1 0
MBRQ MRCS
SW6
ON12345678
SW7
SW2 START JACK
MRCS
Channel Designation: 240 sec. mode

JP0
SW4
BATTERY PACK
JP0
LEFT
A-law/-law: -law
Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.
Front (DAT) jack earphone jack (3.6 )
Tape Recorder
Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded. (To record a message in the 240 sec mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.) Turn the WR key upwards. (The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder has been connected to the circuit.) Turn the START key upwards. (The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)
NDA-24296
Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel. - recording -
The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 - BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.) Return the START, WR key to the previous position.
HOW TO PLAY BACK THE RECORDED MESSAGE
Playback from a telephone set Set the related switches on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card. Seize a specific channel by Individual Trunk Access. Hear the recorded message.
Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATB (DAT) card Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card. Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch. Turn the START key upwards. Hear the recorded message.
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME MB SWITCH SHAPE
ON
MODULE
REMARKS
ON
START
ON
WR
MBRQ
3 2 1 0
MRCS
1234
SW1
1234
SW2
1234
SW3
1234
SW4
1234
SW5
12345678
SW6
SW7
1234
JP0
LEFT RIGHT
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
PH-M16
Line Test
1. General Function This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscribers line. The circuit card supports to send howler tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, and send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.
Note:
A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of line available the line test/automatic trunk test at the same time is only one.
TEL
LC TSW M U X
TEL
LC
PIM LPRA
TEST EQ
LTST
EXTENDED I/O BUS EXTENDED I/O BUS
GT
CPU
Figure 3-164 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System)
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below.
Note:
This circuit card is used for 1-IMG System.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
LPM
PH-M16
PH-M16
PH-M16
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-165.
OPE/MB MB
SW0
CRIN
Figure 3-165 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Note:
CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
4.
Lamp Indications The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.
LAMP NAME OPE/MB Red This circuit card is make-busy.
COLOR Green This circuit card is operating.
DESCRIPTION
5.
Switch Settings The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard setting, it is indicated with X in the table below.
SWITCH
SETTING UP
MEANING Circuit card make-busy. Circuit card make-busy cancel
MB DOWN 1 2 3 OFF ON 4 OFF Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone to ODT (Set soft control only)
BASIC INTERVAL TIMER SW0 5 6 7 8 TIME
ON ON ON
Setting of a condition of DT detection (440Hz+350Hz) Setting of a condition of RBT detection (440Hz+480Hz) Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67msc.)
Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133msec.) Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone to ODT (Set soft control or E-wire loop back)
SW0
5
ON ON ON ON
OFF ON ON ON
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF ON
8 16 32 64
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
6.
External Interface
MISC Connector Accommodation

Circuit Card Backboard Connector Connector Name Slot Number
00 01 02 03 04
(PH-M16) PH-M16 PH-M16 Circuit Card Backboard Connector MISC CONNECTOR 68PH EXMISC CABLE MISC CONNECTOR
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TE BELL0B BELL1B TELB LCB THOWB THOWS SE ATB OUTB TB1 BELL EXMJ MJ0B MN0B MJ1B MN1B INB 1 TM 2 BELL0A 3 BELL1A TELA 4 LCA 5 6 THOWA ONHK 7 TCR 8 ATM 9 ATA 10 11 OUTA TA1 12 13 14 EXMN MJ0A 15 16 MN0A MJ1A 17 18 MN1A INA 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
LPM
LPM Backboard MISC
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
PBX
MDF
LTST
TM TE OUTA OUTB INA INB TA1 TB1 E M RA RB TA TB A B
ODT
LC
NDA-24296
PH-M16 Line Test
7.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON(MB)
SWITCH NAME
REMARKS
MB
OFF ON 12345678
SW0
NDA-24296
PA-4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk
PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk
1. General Function This circuit card is bidirectional amplifier circuitry to be used for such a purpose as level guaranteeing in a public linetie line connection. The circuit card is provided with four bidirectional amplifier circuits and controls gains to speech loss which may vary with the kind of line involved in the connection. Also, this circuit card is provided with the function to disable the AGC when modem signals such as FAX signals have arrived.
TSW Public N.W C.O. Trunk
Fix AMP ECb Echo Canceller which suppresses echo in the hybrid circuit of a C.O. trunk. Echo Canceller which suppresses echo ECb: in the tie-line side. Automatic Gain Control circuit (amplifies AGC: voice signals arriving from the public network.) FixAMP: Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies voice signals arriving from the tie-line network.) PAD: Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies voice signals arriving from the public network) ECa: ECa AGC PAD PA-4AMPC
Tie Line N.W
Tie Line Trunk
Figure 3-168 Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
OPE
SW00 SW11
MB BL3 BL0 MB3
SW10
SW12 SW01
MB0
SW02
SW03 SW04
Figure 3-169 Face Layout of PA-4AMPC (4AMP)
4.
LAMP NAME COLOR
STATE
OPE BL0
Green Green Flash OFF
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy. BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is in idle state.
BL3
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
SW00
(MB)
UP DOWN 0 ON OFF 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 1 2 3 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 4
Circuit card make busy cancel The corresponding circuit is in make busy state. Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled. The corresponding circuit is in make busy state. Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled. The corresponding circuit is in make busy state. Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled. The corresponding circuit is in make busy state. Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled. Fixed Fixed Fixed Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate. (When this switch has been set to ON, set SW10, SW11, and SW12 to right side.)
SW01
SW02 OFF
Only ECa (Public Line) side operates. (When this switch has been set to OFF, set SW10, SW11, and SW12 to left side.) Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed
5 6 7 8
OFF OFF OFF OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO.
SETTING
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
When this card works as AGC:

SW03-1 SW03-2 SETTING OF FIXED GAIN OF FIX AMP
SW03 SW04
ON OFF ON OFF
SW03-3
ON ON OFF OFF
SW03-4
0 dB (Standard) 4 dB 8 dB 12 dB
SETTING OF GAIN OF BY AGC
ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF
0dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -15dBm0 are adjusted to -15dBm0] (Standard) +4dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -11dBm0 are adjusted to -11dBm0] -4dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -19dBm0 are adjusted to -19dBm0] When this card does not work as AGC:
SW04 is set to all ON.

Amplification of voice from the public network Amplification of voice from the tie-line network
0 dB
4 dB
8 dB
12 dB
SW03 0 dB SW04 SW03 4 dB SW04 SW03 8 dB SW04 SW03 12 dB SW04
ON
SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Right (SIG) SW10 Left (CAS) Right (SIG) SW11 Left (CAS) Right (SIG) SW12 Left (CAS)
Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.
Only ECa (Public Line) side operates. Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate. Only ECa (Public Line) side operates. Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate. Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.
NDA-24296
6.
MODULE
SWITCH SHAPE
3 2 1 0
REMARKS
PIM
SW01
Make busy switch of the corresponding circuit (No. 0 ~ No. 3 circuits) ON : Make busy of each circuit OFF : Make busy cancel of each circuit
ON
SW02
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
SW03
ON
12 3 4
SW04
ON
12 3 4
SW04
Left
Right
SW11
Left
Right
SW12
Left
Right
SW00 (MB)
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk
PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk
1. General Function The PA-8TLTR(TLT) circuit card provides eight trunks whose interface can be selected among the following four types by key setting on a 4-channel basis. Loop Dialing (LD) Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 2-wire E & M 4-wire E & M
In addition, programmable PADs, whose value can be adjusted by key setting, are equipped with a 4-wire E & M interface. Note that a cable, which is connected to the ODT connector on the front edge of this card, is necessary when circuits #4 through #7 are used as 2-wire/4-wire E & M trunks. A typical example of channel allocation is illustrated in Figure 3-170.
INT
SW
INT
PA-8TLTR ODT #0
circuit #0
MDF 2W/4W Carrier Equipment PRIVATE NETWORK
LC Terminal
ODT #3 DID #0
circuit #3 circuit #4
LC Terminal DID #3
circuit #7
PUBLIC NETWORK
Note:
This diagram shows an example when the PA-8TLTR is used as four 2W/4W E&M and four DID trunks. In this instance, a flat cable connection is not required.
Figure 3-170 Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location / Condition The PA-8TLTR (TLT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
OPE
MB BL7 BL0 MB7 MB0
SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
ODT
Note
Note:
This connector is used when E & M is selected for circuits #4 through #7.
Figure 3-171 Face Layout of PA-8TLTR (TLT) Card
4.
LAMP NAME OPE BL0
COLOR Green Green Flash OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or while DP signals are being received (flashes to the dial pulses) Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
BL7
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH SETTING NO. UP DOWN ON 0 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy
SWITCH MB (SW00) MB0 - 7 (SW01)
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel Make busy of the No. 0 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 0 circuit Make busy of the No. 1 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 1 circuit Make busy of the No. 2 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 2 circuit Make busy of the No. 3 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 3 circuit Make busy of the No. 4 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 4 circuit Make busy of the No. 5 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 5 circuit Make busy of the No. 6 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 6 circuit Make busy of the No. 7 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 7 circuit
NDA-24296
SWITCH
SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING 1 2 3

SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3
MEANING
0-3 CIRCUIT TRUNK KIND 4-7 CIRCUIT TRUNK KIND
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF
LD/DID EMT Not used 2W/4W E&M
LD/DID LD/DID Not used 2W/4W E&M
SW0 (SW10)
4 5 6 7 8
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
Not used Fixed Fixed Fixed Not used Programmable PAD P0 Value 0.5 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 1 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 2 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 4 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 8 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB P0 value is determined as a sum of selected PAD values of SW1 (elements 1-5). Note that this setting is valid for 4W E&M system. -ExampleSW1-1: ON SW1-2: OFF SW1-3: OFF SW1-4: ON SW1-5: ON (0.5 dB) ( 0 dB) ( 0 dB) ( 4 dB) ( 8 dB)
1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 SW1 (SW15) OFF 6 OFF Fixed
In this case P0 value is 12.5 dB.
<Setting Range of Programmable PAD Values>

PAD VALUE [dB] SEND RECEIVE
Possible Setting Range
P0: P2:
0 - +15.5 0.5 step 0 - +7.5 0.5 step
P1: P3:
0 - +15.5 0.5 step 0 - +7.5 0.5 step
7 8
OFF OFF
Not used Not used
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW2 (SW20)
STANDARD SWITCH SETTING SETTING NO. ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF
MEANING Programmable PAD P1 Value 0.5 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 1 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 2 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 4 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 8 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB P1 value is determined as a sum of selected PAD values of SW2 (elements 1-5). Note that this setting is valid for 4W E&M system. - Example SW2-1: ON SW2-2: OFF SW2-3: OFF SW2-4: ON SW2-5: ON (0.5 dB) ( 0 dB) ( 0 dB) ( 4 dB) ( 8 dB)
In this case P1 value is 12.5 dB.
Fixed Fixed Fixed
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW3 (SW25)
SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
MEANING Programmable PAD P2 Value 0.5 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 1 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 2 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 4 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0.5 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 1 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 2 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 4 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB P2 Values is total of PAD Values Note (Valid when 4W E&M system) (Ex) SW3-1: OFF SW3-2: ON SW3-3: OFF SW3-4: OFF in this case P2 value is 1 dB.
P3 Values is total of PAD Values Note (Valid when 4W E&M system) (Ex) SW3-5: OFF SW3-6: ON SW3-7: OFF SW3-8: OFF in this case P3 value is 1 dB.
Note:
For the setting range of Programmable PAD Values, see the Setting Range of Programmable PAD Values shown for SW1.
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW4 (SW30 [No.0-3 Circuit] SW5 (SW40) [No. 4-7 Circuit] (When Trunk Kind has been set as LD/DID)
STANDARD SWITCH SETTING SETTING NO.
MEANING
Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network (Valid for LD/DID)

SW4/5 1 2 3 4 Terminating Impedance Balancing Network
1K
1~4
350
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
600
2.16 F 0.21 F (EIA/TIA -464A) 600
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
5 6 7 8
OFF OFF OFF OFF
Fixed Not used Not used Not used
NDA-24296
SWITCH SW4 (SW30 [No.0-3 Circuit] SW5 (SW40) [No. 4-7 Circuit] (When Trunk Kind has been set as 2W E&M)
SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING
MEANING
Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network (Valid for E&M)

SW4/5 1 2 3 4 6 Terminating Impedance Balancing Network
1K
1 ~ 4, 6
350
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
600
2.16 F 0.21 F (EIA/TIA -464A) 600
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
5 6
OFF ON OFF
Not used Speech Line: 2-wire Speech Line: 4-wire
OFF ON
Fixed E&M Control Idle: Ground E&M Control Idle: Open Busy: Battery Busy: Ground
8 OFF
NDA-24296
Reference : Table of Fixed PADs

PAD VALUE [dB] ARTD COMMAND 4W E&M PAD DATA SEND 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 P0 3 6 12 16 P2 0 RECEIVE P1 3 6 11 11 P3 0 SEND 0 3 6 6 0 0 0 LD/2W E&M
1
RECEIVE 0 3 6 -6 -6 0 0 SEND 0 6 0 0 0 0 0
2
RECEIVE -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6
PAD VALUE [dB] APAD COMMAND 4W E&M PAD DATA SEND 1 2 3 4 5 15 3 6 12 16 P2 0 RECEIVE 3 6 11 11 P3 0 SEND 3 6 6 0 0 0 LD/2W E&M
1
RECEIVE 3 6 -6 -6 0 0 SEND 6 6 0 0 0 0
2
RECEIVE -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6
1 :When SW2-8 is set to ON. (other than the case of 2 ) 2 :When SW2-8 is set to OFF. (i.e PAD for TS003 is provided; only for Australia)
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface Accommodation of LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-172. See also: Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID 2W E&M) Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M) 2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation 2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 (TB0) B1 (TB1) B2 (TB2) B3 (TB3) B4 (TB4) B5 (TB5) B6 (TB6) B7 (TB7) RB0 RB1 RB2 RB3 M0 M1 M2 M3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 (TA0) A1 (TA1) A2 (TA2) A3 (TA3) A4 (TA4) A5 (TA5) A6 (TA6) A7 (TA7) RA0 RA1 RA2 RA3 E0 E1 E2 E3 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
B0 (TB0) B1 (TB1) B2 (TB2) B3 (TB3) B4 (TB4) B5 (TB5) B6 (TB6) B7 (TB7) RB0 RB1 RB2 RB3 M0 M1 M2 M3
A0 (TA0) A1 (TA1) A2 (TA2) A3 (TA3) A4 (TA4) A5 (TA5) A6 (TA6) A7 (TA7) RA0 RA1 RA2 RA3 E0 E1 E2 E3
LT1
LT2
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 564 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT3 LT4 RB0 RB1 RB2 RB3 M0 M1 M2 M3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA0 RA1 RA2 RA3 E0 E1 E2 E3
B0 (TB0) B1 (TB1) B2 (TB2) B3 (TB3) B4 (TB4) B5 (TB5) B6 (TB6) B7 (TB7)
A0 (TA0) A1 (TA1) A2 (TA2) A3 (TA3) A4 (TA4) A5 (TA5) A6 (TA6) A7 (TA7)
LT1
LT2
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
LD/DID
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a LD or DID trunk.
PBX LT Connector PA-8TLTR A0 B0 Installation Cable MDF A B NETWORK
A7 B7
A B
2W E&M
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 2-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, E&M leads for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.
PBX ODT Connector PA-8TLTR LT Connector A0 B0 E0 M0 Installation Cable MDF A B E M 2-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT
A3 B3 E3 M3 A4 B4 E4 M4 2400 ODT CABLE A7 B7 E7 M7
A B E M A B E M 2-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT 2-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT
A B E M 2-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT
Figure 3-173 Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID 2W E&M)
NDA-24296
4W E&M
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 4-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, RA, RB, and E&M leads for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.
PBX ODT connector PA-8TLTR LT Connector
A0(TA0) B0(TB0) RA0 RB0 E0 M0
Installation Cable MDF
TA TB RA RB E M
4-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT
TA TB RA RB E M
2400 ODT CABLE
TA TB RA RB E M
Figure 3-174 Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M)
NDA-24296
2400 ODT CABLE

The "2400 ODT CABLE" has one ODT connector whose lead accommodation is shown below.
ODT Connector channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Champ Connector RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7)
"2400 ODT CABLE"
"2400 ODT CABLE"
Champ Connector (Female)
34
LT 3m (10 feet)
To "ODT" connector
To MDF
Note:
Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.
Figure 3-175 2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation
NDA-24296
2400 ODT CABLE-A

The "2400 ODT CABLE-A" has three ODT connectors whose lead accommodation is shown below.
ODT Connectors channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) (NC) RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) (NC) RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) (NC) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (NC) RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (NC) RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (NC) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Champ Connectors RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (DE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (DE) channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7
channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7
channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7 To ODT Connector
To MDF 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (DE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) (DE)
"2400 ODT CABLE-A"
Note:
Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.
Figure 3-176 2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME MB (SW00)
OFF
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MODULE PIM
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
ON
MB0-7 (SW01)
ON
SW0 (SW10)
12 34 5 678
ON
SW1 (SW15)
12 34 5 678
ON
SW2 (SW20)
12 34 5 678
ON
SW3 (SW25)
12 34 5 678
ON
SW4 (SW30)
12 34 5 678
ON
SW5 (SW40)
12 34 5 678
ON
NDA-24296
PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter
PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter
1. General Function This circuit card is used to provide an interface between the Attendant Console(s) and the external recording/paging equipment as shown in the figure below. Occupying every two slots within a PIM, a single interface adapter can handle a maximum of six ATTCONs and one-or two-circuit recording/paging equipment to combine. The connection patterns for the devices and service activation via ATTCONs can vary, depending on key settings on the card (see Section 5, 'Switch Settings' for details).
ATTCON
MDF MDF Recording Device
Max.6
RECC/PGADP or Paging Device ATTCON
MDF MDF Recording Device
Max.3
or Paging Device RECC/PGADP Recording Device or Paging Device
MDF Max.3
Figure 3-177 Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below. Note that this circuit card requires a vacancy of two consecutive slots.
Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors Face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-178.
SW12 SW13
ATT5 ATT4 ATT3 ATT2 ATT1 ATT0 VR0 VR1
SW11 SW10
SW15 REC/PGA (To MDF)
SW14
Figure 3-178 Face Layout of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP)
4.
Lamp Indications The table below shows the meaning of lamp indications.
LAMP NAME
COLOR
MEANING
Provided that any of the ATTCONs has a connection to the Recording/Paging Green equipment via the card, the lamp(s) corresponding to the citedATTCON number(s) (Steady-ON) emit(s) steady light. ATT0 ~ ATT5 Green (Flash) Provided that any of the ATTCONs has not established a connection with the Recording/Paging equipment, the lamp(s) corresponding to the cited ATTCON number(s) emit(s) flashing light.
NDA-24296
5.
Switch Settings Switch settings on the card and their detailed meanings are as follows:
SWITCH NO. 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON STANDARD SETTING
SWITCH NAME
SETTING ON
MEANING Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop start (constant) No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine =6:1 Note 1 No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine = 3 : 1 2 sets Note 1 Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal sending (momentary) Note 2 Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal sending (constant) Note 2
SW10
ON 12 3 4 56 7 8
4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
Note 1: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW12 and SW13. Note 2: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required.
PATTERN FOR START SIGNAL TRANSMISSION KEY SETTING (SW10-8) KEY SETTING (SW14, SW15)
Momentary Loop Start/Momentary Ground Start Constant Loop Start/Constant Ground Start Telephone Loop (Handset lifting)
ON OFF OFF
Up Up Down
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW11
SWITCH NO.
SETTING RIGHT
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Remote Phone is used.
3
LEFT Remote Phone is not used.
Left
SW12 SW13
Right
UP No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine =6:1 Note 4
3 2 1
SW14 SW15
UP
DOWN No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine = 3 : 1 2 sets Note 4
DOWN
1 2 3
UP
UP
Patterns for Recording/Paging activation: by loop start/ground start signal sending Note 3 Patterns for Recording/Paging activation: via the telephone loop (handset lifting) Note 3
DOWN
DOWN
VR0 Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for 1st circuit of Recording/Paging machine. (Volume Resistance) VR1 Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for 2nd circuit of Recording/Paging machine. (Volume Resistance)
Warning:
When the Remote Phone is not used, be sure to turn the SW11 to the left side. If the switch key is left on the right side, the machine components may be damaged by over current.
Note 3: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required. Note 4: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW10-7.
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface The location of REC/PGA connector leads and their connection diagram are shown in Figure 3-179.
Location of REC/PGA Connector Leads
CHAMP Connector (J) REC/PGA

26 B0 27 M0B 28 K0B 29 B1 30 M1B 31 K1B 32 B2 33 M2B 34 K2B 35 B3 36 M3B 37 K3B 38 B4 39 M4B 40 K4B 41 B5 42 M5B 43 K5B 44 ZB 45 L0B 46 L1B 47 T0B 48 T1B 49 50 1 A0 2 M0A 3 K0A 4 A1 5 M1A 6 K1A 7 A2 8 M2A 9 K2A 10 A3 11 M3A 12 K3A 13 A4 14 M4A 15 K4A 16 A5 17 M5A 18 K5A 19 ZA 20 L0A 21 L1A 22 T0A 23 T1A 24 T0C 25 T1C
For ATT #0 For ATT #1 For ATT #2 For ATT #3 For ATT #4 For ATT #5 For Recording/Paging Machine #0
For Recording/Paging Machine #1 Note
Note: These leads are used when the two - circuit system is adopted for the Recording/Paging service features (No. of ATTCON: Output Equipment = 3 : 1 2 circuits).
Figure 3-179 REC/PGA Connector Leads
See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-180)
NDA-24296
[ In case telephone set loop is used for Recording/Paging activation]
PBX RECC/ PGADP A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B MDF KA KB LA LB A B To ATT
Front connector
50FLT-CHAMP CABLE
Note 1 Note 2
To Recording/ Speech Signal Paging machine Leads Note 3 Telephone Terminal Side Leads
Note 1: For speech signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 2: For control signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 3: There is restriction here in case a Recording machine is used: The Recording machine should be the type which is fixed between the Central Office and telephone terminals.
NDA-24296
[ In case Recording/Paging is activated by the loop start or ground start signal sending ]
PBX RECC/ PGADP A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C MDF KA KB LA LB A B To ATT
Front connector
50FLT-CHAMP CABLE
Note 1 Note 2
To Recording/ Speech Signal Paging machine Leads Loop Start Leads Ground Start Leads
Note 1: For speech signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 2: For control signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.
NDA-24296
[ In case 7 or more ATTCONs are connected to a single Recording/Paging machine ]
PBX RECC/ PGADP Front connector RECC/ PGADP
50FLT-CHAMP CABLE A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C ZA ZB L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C ZA ZB A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B
MDF KA KB LA LB A B To ATT
To Recording/ Paging machine
50FLT-CHAMP CABLE
Note 2
Note 1
KA KB LA LB A B
To ATT
Note 1: To use a single Recording/Paging machine for 7 or more ATTCONs, the necessary number of PA-M87 card(s) must be reinforced, according the ATT number, on the side of the ICS. If this is the case, provide relevant multiple connections between the first-card connector leads and the leads due for the reinforced circuit card(s). Note that the connection should be performed on the MDF and each connector lead name must be identical in each connection proccess. (example) L0A (below) T0A (below) L0A (above) T0A (above) L0B (below) T0B (below) L0B (above) T0B (above)
Note 2: When performing the multiple connections, the leads here (ZA and ZB) must be given another multiple connection in addition to that required in a normal pattern (refer to Note 1).
NDA-24296
[ In case the TLT card (analog station) is connected instead of ATTCONs ]
PBX RECC/ PGADP A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C MDF A B M E To TLT E&M Signal Leads
Front connector
50FLT-CHAMP CABLE
To Paging Speech Signal Machine Leads Loop Start Leads Note
Note : When the Paging machine is to be activated by the ground start, connect the T0B lead to the ground.
NDA-24296
7.

SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS
SWITCH NAME
SW10
ON
12 3 4 56 7 8
1
SW11
Left
Right UP
3
SW12 SW13
2 1
3
DOWN
UP
SW14 SW15
2 1
DOWN
VR0 (Volume Resistance)
VR1 (Volume Resistance)
NDA-24296
PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk
PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk
1. General Function The PA-24PRTB-A (PRT) circuit card is a digital interface supporting voice and data communications at 1.5 M bit/sec. Being equipped with a Link Access Procedure for a D channel (LAP D) controller based on the ITU-T I/Q series, this card provides a Primary Rate Access Interface (PRI) with the system. A built-in resonance circuit extracts clock signals, which are supplied from the network, so that the system may be in exact synchronization with the network. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is also equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.
Speech Path (PCM Signal) D-channel Signaling Link
INT
TSW
INT 24ch 2-wire T 2-wire R 24PRT 1.544MHz Clock Extraction from Network PLO ISDN NETWORK
I/O Local Bus
System Clock CPU
Figure 3-181 Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location / Condition The PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) card can be mounted in the following shaded universal slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note:
This card cannot be mounted in slot 5. This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0 (U=0) of even-number Module Group. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-182.
SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Note Universal Slots Universal Slots
3.
OPE N-OPE MB
PCM BER AIS DOPE PKT 3 2 1 0 FRM RMT LYR
LB MODE BL23
SW0 SW1 CN2
BL00
Figure 3-182 Face Layout of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 583 Revision 1.0
4.
Table 3-15 PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference
LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE PCM FRM PER RMT AIS DOPE LYR RKT BL00
COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Red Yellow Green Green Green Green Flash OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when input signal down is detected (PCM LOSS). Lights when frame alignment loss is detected. Lights when a CRC error occur frequently. Lights on receiving Remote Alarm Indication (RAI). Lights on detection of AIS. Remains lit while the D Channel Controller is on. Lights when the link of the D channel is set up. Lights when the packet of the D channel is in use. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM). Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. (When BL23 is in used as D channel, lamp is always on.)
BL23
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME MB
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel AT&T (#4/#5 ESS) NT DMS 100/DMS 250 Q-SIG. (ETS 300 172) Internal loop back set
MODE
5 7 10
LB 0
ON OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF
Internal loop back cancel Line loop back set Line loop back cancel Payload loop back set Payload loop back cancel D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request cancel Impedance 100 Impedance 110 Send transformer middle point Ground
SW0 1
ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 ON
Send transformer middle point Open Receive transformer middle point Ground Receive transformer middle point Open Fixed
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SW1
SWITCH NO.
1 2 3
SETTING
OFF ON ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
Standard setting (Digital PAD/ROM selection) Fixed Interface structure: 24B Interface structure: 23B + D D channel packet service is provided. D channel packet service is not provided.
SETTING OF EQUALIOZER SW2-1 SW2-2 SW2-3 DISTANCE
4 OFF SW2 1
3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF SW3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF Other combinations
0 ~ 40m 40 ~ 80m 80 ~ 120m 120 ~ 160m 160 ~ 200m Not allowed
24-Multiframe Zero Suppress Select B8ZS (24-multiframe) Standard setting Standard setting Line fault is notified to the upper CPU. Line fault is not notified to the upper CPU. Fixed Fixed Alarm processing select Fixed to OFF Main Signal All 1 supervision is not made. Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW4
SWITCH NO. 1 2 3
SETTING OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Fixed (D channel) D Channel Mode Selection; Used Side D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side D Channel Signal Logic; Negative
D Channel Signal Logic; Positive (Standard)

SW4-4 SW4-5 D-channel Speed
5 6 7 8 SW5 1
ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
64 kbps (Standard) Not used 56 kbps Not used
Fixed Fixed Fixed PAD Pattern Selection

SW5-1 SW5-2 SW5-3 PAD Pattern
2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive)
Note:
When setting this switch, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.

SW5-5 DIGITAL PAD CONTROL
SW5-4
ON ON OFF OFF
SW5-6
ON OFF ON OFF
SW5-7
Both directions Receive only (Standard) Send only ARTD Fixed

DATA PAD CONTROL
ON ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
64 k (Standard) 56 k AT & T 64 k INV. 48 k PROTIMS
IDLE code is sent out.
IDLE code is not sent out.
NDA-24296
PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24PRTB-A
This card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of the SW 5 (elements 1, 2, 3) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - PAD. The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting) PAD DATA ARTD PAD PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive)
SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE 1 2 3 4 5 7 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] -3 [dB] Note 3 [dB] 0 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 6 [dB] 9 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB]
PAD value complies with key settings of SW5-6,7. (Irrelevant to PAD patterns) 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through
Note:
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT6 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
Accommodated in 1 LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 E RB POUTB TB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E RA POUTA TA
E RB POUTB TB
E RA POUTA TA
E RB POUTB TB
E RA POUTA TA
LT2
LT4
LT5
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24PRTB-A circuit card is as follows.

MDF PBX To DSU (Digital Service Unit)
24 PRT IN OUT
RA RB TA TB POUTA POUTB
RA RB TA TB
PLO
DIU1A DIU1B
clock extraction
Note
Note:
As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information on the PLO card, see Chapter 2 in this manual.
NDA-24296
7.

MODULE PIM
MODE
LB
3 2 1 0 ON ON 1234
SW0
ON
SW1
1234
ON
12345678
SW2
ON
12345678
SW3
ON
12345678
SW4
ON
12345678
SW5
MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface
PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface
1. General Function The PA-24DTR (24DTI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at 1.544 Mbit/s. This card can be also used as an interface for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) or an ISDN network when being connected to an additional CCH or DCH circuit card with a flat cable as illustrated below. A built-in resonance circuit can be used for the purpose of extracting clock signals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.
Note CCH/DCH
INT
TSW
INT 24ch
Flat Cable
2 T 2 R DTI(PA-24DTR) 1.544MHz Clock Extraction (for a PLO-secondary office)

DIGITAL NETWORK
I/O Local Bus CPU
System Clock PLO
: Common Channel Signaling Link : Speech Path (PCM signal) : Clock Signal
Note:
When PA-24DTR is used in an Associated Channel Interoffice Signaling (ACIS) system, CCH/DCH is not required.
Figure 3-185 Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24DTR (DTI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-186. Note that there are two types of PA-24DTR (DTI) cards which differ in their face layouts.
OPE N-OPE SW00

PCM BER AIS 3 2 1 0 FRM RMT
SW01
BL23 SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 BL00 SW15 SW14 CN2
SW4D
SW5D
OPE N-OPE SW6C MB

SW39
SW13B
BL23 SW58 SW25
BL00 CN2
Figure 3-186 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DTI)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE PCM FRM BER RMT AIS BL00
COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Red Yellow Green Flash OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS). Lights in the case of frame alignment loss. Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe. Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication. Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS). Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM). Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
BL23
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SW01/13B
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel Internal Loopback : Set
Internal Loopback : Cancel External Loopback : Set External Loopback : Cancel Payload Loopback : Set Payload Loopback : Cancel All Channel Make Busy : Set Note All Channel Make Busy : Cancel
Note:
This switch setting is applicable for a system adopts Associated Channel Interoffice Signalling (ACIS).
As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the SW01/13B.
PA-24 DTR (DTI) TDSW Interface Line Interface R Speech Path T DIGITAL NETWORK Speech Path Control Block
Framer
Switch
Internal Loopback
PAD
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW15/25
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Impedance Setting: 100 [] Impedance Setting: 110 [] Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground
OFF ON
Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open Idle Code: To be sent out Not to be sent out PAD Control
OFF ON
4 SW11/39 1
OFF ON OFF ON
SW11/39-1
SW11/39-2
PAD Control
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
Bothway Receive only (Send 0dB) Send only (Receive 0dB) Fixed to ARTD command
Data PAD Control

SW11/39-3 SW11/39-4 Data PAD Value
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
64 Kbps 56 Kbps 48 Kbps 64 Kbps INV
T Signal Control
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
R Signal Control
SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 R Signal Control
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW10/4D
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative
Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled Data Link Control: MOS Data Link Control: BOS (For NEAX2400 ICS) Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution) When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for North America specification. (For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.) Equalizer Setting
SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance
OFF ON
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF ON
7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW12/58 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON
ON ON ON ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF ON Other Combinations
ON OFF ON OFF ON
0~133 (ft)/0~40 (m) 133~267 (ft)/40~80 (m) 267~400 (ft)/80~120 (m) 400~533(ft)/120~160 (m) 533~667(feet)/ 160~200(m) Impossible
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW12/58
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON
STANDARD SETTING PAD Pattern Selection

SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5
MEANING
4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW14/5D 1 OFF 2 ON OFF ON 3 OFF ON OFF ON
SW12/58-6
PAD Pattern
Note:
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Other Combinations
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) Loss (Bothway) Loss (Receive) Impossible

SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 Kind of Alarm
ON ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
Alarm is not sent out All 1 RMT
(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 Setting is OFF.) Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.)
Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.) LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive Note: LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative Send a notice in the event of a line fault.
Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault. Zero Code Suppression is not provided. Zero Code Suppression is provided.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW13/6C
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING
Fixed to all ON.
Netfusing : Not used Netfusing : used
NDA-24296
PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DTI)
As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - CDN=30(PAD). The PAD patterns and ARTD data correspond as listed below.
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting) PAD DATA ARTD CDN=30 PAD Pattern 1 SEND 1 2 3 4 5 7 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] RECEIVE 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] PAD Pattern 2 SEND RECEIVE A Loss (Bothway) SEND RECEIVE A Loss (Receive) SEND RECEIVE A Loss (Bothway) SEND RECEIVE A Loss (Receive) SEND 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through RECEIVE 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB] Through
-3 [dB] 3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Note 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8[dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] Key settings of SW 11/39 - 3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD patterns). 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through
Note:
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 E 36 37 RB 38 POUTB 39 40 41 TB 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 LT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
E RA POUTA TA
E RB POUTB TB
E RA POUTA TA
LT4
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DTI) circuit card is as follows.
PBX MDF DTI OUT IN TA TB RA RB POUTA POUTB Note 1 PLO DIU1A DIU1B Note 2 TA TB RA RB CARRIER EQUIPMENT
Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side. Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about these
leads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.

NDA-24296
7.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SW01/13B
3 2 1 0 ON
MODULE PIM
SWITCH SHAPE
REMARKS
SW10/4D
4-multiframe DTI Standard

ON 12345678
ON
12345678

ON 12345678
SW11/39

ON 12345678
ON
12345678

ON 12345678
SW13/6C
ON
12345678
Fixed to all ON.
SW12/58
ON
12345678 Note
Note:
Equalizer Setting
SW15/25
ON
1 2 3 4
SW14/5D
ON

ON 1234
1 2 3 4

ON 1234
SW00/MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface
PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface
1. General Function The PA-24DTR (24DLI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital lines and the system at 1.544 Mbit/s. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings.
Note:
The key settings become valid when SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1.
INT
TSW
INT 24ch T R DLI(PA-24DTR)

TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
I/O Local Bus CPU
: Speech Path (PCM signal) : Clock Signal
Figure 3-190 Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System
NDA-24296
2.
Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24DTR (DLI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.
Mounting Module
PIM
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Universal Slots
Universal Slots
NDA-24296
3.
Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-191. Note that there are two types of PA-24DTR (DLI) cards which differ in their face layouts.
OPE N-OPE SW00

SW01
BL23 SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10
BL00 SW15 SW14 CN2
SW4D
SW5D
OPE N-OPE SW6C MB

SW39
SW01
BL23 SW58 SW25
BL00 CN2
Figure 3-191 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DLI)
NDA-24296
4.
LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE PCM FRM BER RMT AIS BL00
COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Red Yellow Green Flash OFF
STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS). Lights in the case of frame alignment loss. Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe. Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication. Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS). Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM). Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.
BL23
NDA-24296
5.
SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SW01/13B
SWITCH NO.
SETTING UP DOWN ON
MEANING
Circuit card make busy cancel Internal Loopback : Set Internal Loopback : Cancel External Loopback : Set External Loopback : Cancel Payload Loopback : Set Payload Loopback : Cancel Not used (Fixed to OFF)
0 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF 3 OFF
As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the SW01/13B.
PA-24 DTR (DLI) TDSW Interface Line Interface R Speech Path T TERMINAL EQUIPMENT Speech Path Control Block
Framer
Switch
Internal Loopback
PAD
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Impedance Setting: 100 [] Impedance Setting: 110 [] Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground
2 OFF SW15/25 ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF ON 5 SW11/39 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open Idle Code: To be sent out Not to be sent out One Digit Dialing: Valid
One Digit Dialing: Invalid Not used (Fixed to OFF) Not used (Fixed to OFF) Not used (Fixed to OFF) T Signal Control
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
R Signal Control
SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 R Signal Control
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON OFF OFF
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW10/4D
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative
Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out Not used (Fixed to OFF) Data Link Control: MOS Data Link Control: BOS Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution) When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for North America specification. (For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.) Equalizer Setting
SW12/58-1 ON ON ON ON OFF SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 ON OFF ON OFF ON Distance 0~133 (feet)/0~40 (m) 133~267 (feet)/40~80 (m) 267~400 (feet)/80~120 (m) 400~533 (feet)/120~160 (m) 533~667 (feet)/160~200 (m) Impossible
2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW12/58 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF OFF ON Other Combinations
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW12/58
SWITCH NO.
SETTING ON
STANDARD SETTING PAD Pattern Selection
MEANING
4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW14/5D 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON
SW12/58-4
SW12/58-5
SW12/58-6
PAD Pattern
Note:
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Other Combinations
PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) Loss (Bothway) Loss (Receive) Impossible

SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 Kind of Alarm
ON ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
Alarm is not sent out All 1 RMT
(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 standard Setting is OFF.) Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.)
Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.) LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative Send a notice in the event of a line fault.
Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault. Zero Code Suppression is not provided. Zero Code Suppression is provided.
NDA-24296
SWITCH NAME SW13/6C
SWITCH NO. 1
SETTING ON OFF ON
STANDARD SETTING
MEANING Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Valid
Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Invalid Ringer Control: Continuous Ringer Control: Intermittent Sending PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note
2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF Note:
SW13/6C-3
SW13/6C-4
SW13/6C-5
PAD Value
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
0 dB 2 dB 4 dB 6 dB 8 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
Receiving PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note
SW13/6C-6
SW13/6C-7
SW13/6C-8
PAD Value
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
0 dB 2 dB 4 dB 6 dB 8 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
This PAD value table is PAD pattern 1. If other PAD pattern is required, assign PAD pattern by elements 4~6 of SW12/58. The elements become valid when assigning ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1. When ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=0, PAD value is 0dB.
NDA-24296
PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DLI)
As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card.
SW13/6C SEND-3,4,5 RECEIVE-6,7,8 3 6 4 7 5 SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE 8 PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 PAD Pattern (selected by key setting) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive)
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
0 [dB] 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]
0 [dB] 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]
0 [dB] -3 [dB]
Note
0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 6 [dB] 9 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB]
OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
3 [dB] 0 [dB] 3 [dB]
Note:
NDA-24296
6.
External Interface The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.
Mounting Module
PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 E 36 37 RB 38 POUTB 39 40 41 TB 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 LT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8
E RA POUTA TA
E RB POUTB TB
E RA POUTA TA
LT4
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT9 LT10 LT11
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20
Group No.
PIM
Highway Block
HW0
HW1
HW2
HW3 HW4 HW5
HW6
HW7
HW8
HW9 HW10 HW11
NDA-24296
Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DLI) circuit card is as follows.
PBX MDF DLI OUT IN TA TB RA RB TA TB RA RB TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
NDA-24296
7.

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON
MODULE PIM
REMARKS
SW01/13B
3 2 1 0 ON
SW10/4D
24-multiframe DLI Standard

ON 12345678
ON
12345678

ON 12345678
SW11/39

ON 12345678
ON
12345678

ON 12345678
SW13/6C
ON
12345678
SW12/58
ON
12345678 Note
Note:
Equalizer Setting
SW15/25
ON
1 2 3 4
SW14/5D
ON

ON 1234
1 2 3 4

ON 1234
SW00/MB
DOWN
NDA-24296
NDA-24296

NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NDA-24296 ISSUE 1 STOCK # 200774

Circuit Card Manual

NEC America, Inc.

PAGE No. i ii iii iv v vi vii viii ix x xi xii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE DATE DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 1/9

PAGE No. 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 2/9

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 3/9

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 4/9

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 5/9

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 6/9

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 7/9

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 8/9

ISSUE 1 DATE OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE

ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 9/9

NDA-24296 ISSUE 1 OCTOBER, 2000

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Revision 1.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ii Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

LIST OF FIGURES Page iv Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

LIST OF FIGURES Page v Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

LIST OF FIGURES Page vi Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

LIST OF FIGURES Page vii Revision 1.0